Home

ZyXEL VSG-1200 User's Manual

Contents

1. sees 159 Figure 105 LAN DOVIGBS EE EE OE EE Oe SU Hd Read 161 Figure 106 LAN Device Remote Management Example 1 e 162 Figure 107 LAN Devices Example 1 iese es en etat RA N GE tita DER Leda AE EE RA d eden ipa da 162 Figure 108 LAN Device Remote Management Example 2 eee 163 Figure 109 LAN Devices Example 2 issie KERN dri a 163 Figure 110 Sample Statie Routing TOpO OQY ski EDE EE BO GEE EE ee na 164 Figure 111 Advanced Static ROUIE users tasse GERIG ESE asinina an 165 Figure 112 Private LAN Network Example eise eed ee ee AA ee Re AA ee ee emen 168 ac AREE II OE ME 169 Figure Vit Logs SUG in SS REISE EK e Rp PETER PEU de dese LER SG Se EIS GN ERA 170 Figure 115 Loge Log SINGEL SE AA OMIT ER Rd GE GR DA AG RA KG N Ada 172 Figure 116 Advanced Session TAGS EERS ERGER ERGER G rh SEE Ge be REGSE pet adde UR EE ee 176 Figure 117 Session Trace Information Example iisiisis ri bt Se per de ee Di 177 Figure 118 SNMP Management Model 1 crt b KERKE De GR br bv qt robe Ge EP eke Ge ee 178 AA pee EE EE EE OE EE Ri 179 Figure 120 Network Example Using TCP IP RS232 Convertor esses 182 Figure 121 Advanced Setup Miscellanea iS ESE POR EFE S SEG e E Eb GEGEE Ed 183 Figure 122 System oS SYE sa ask Ae wae a ess 184 Figure 123 System Status Current User List isse nee annii kan 186 Figure 124 System Status DHCP CODES issie iss esse ctun etra aeu E bk ta ana GEORG ER R apa
2. Built in Authentication Three pre configured options are provided for easy setup Select gn option that best suits your network needs You must then proceed to configdre the Billing and Accounting settings to complete your setup Current preset option Scenario C Select option C RADIU Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example 52 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 4 Click Apply again to restart the VSG 4 5 Creating Customer Accounts For initial setup you want to configure 10 customer accounts VIP1 VIP2 VIP3 VIP 10 using the Standard billing profile on the VSG Click System Setting gt Accounting and click the Create Static Account In the Prefix field enter VIP which will appear in the account names To create 10 accounts enter 1 the From field and enter 10 in the To field In the Billing Profile field select Standard to apply the profile you just created Select 6 in the Random Static Account Setting Create Static Account Static Account Operator Static Account List Static Account Dynamic Account Create Static Account Static Accounts can be created and managed by a series of specific number like hotel rooms Static accounts reside in the flash memory all the time Generate a batch of static accounts is feature can automatically generate a series of specific numbers of accounts like hotel rooms VIP 1 Maximum 5 numbers 10 Maximum 5 numbers Billin
3. FIELD DESCRIPTION Username Enter the user name exactly as assigned by your ISP If the name is assigned in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above PPP MTU Setting Enter the size of a Maximum Transmission Unit MTU TCP MSS Setting Enter the size of the Maximum Segment Size MSS Service Name Enter the name of your PPPoE service Connect on Demand Select this option when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle timeout in the Max Idle Time field maximum 65535 minutes This is the default setting with an idle timeout of 10 minutes Keep Alive Select this option when you want the Internet connection up all the time and specify a redial period in the Redial Period field maximum 65535 seconds When disconnected the VSG will attempt to bring up the connection after the redial period 6 5 4 WAN Port Mode PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup 66 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 24 System Settings WAN LA
4. 45 3 6 Changing System Login PasswWOoDda cesses SERS dene Ee ee RAS e ke NN EE Red 45 ERK DE VSG AA sanidetdnecannniats 47 au Restarting the ELDERS decken lob basi sadi taa dd 47 3 9 Logging Out of the Web Configurator uxietenasbernivid ub reri tbe bere atate Yita ee PIS 48 Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example ENGEN e A A O YY A A A HQ 50 ka D UT P E EO EE OE a 50 4 2 Configure the VSG for Internet Access ese ke Ek NA ee ENS aate nne ER NN kin 50 43 Create a Billing BPOUIE e 51 4 4 Setting User Authentication Method issie se EE GE KAK AE RA AE EE Re AE KG Ee kk ee 52 45 Creating Customer DOU ee 53 Ee es AE GE E 53 Chapter 5 SUL ood Vies Pacers MR LAURO Rar ETE FOU RUE ARS ea ed RR E CN RE M CIR UEM aR EE CURE LANERO 56 RE Eb EI L E ee ee rorrer 56 Chapter 6 LAN and WAN SEtUB sae see Rp Gee oisi E 60 5 T Facto Eb DOUE sis yi taxe E EE SG Ee GE d ra ia Hd atta perds 60 Ez LAS es RR EE N OR GR ERU 60 6 3 IP Address Assignment m 60 6 3 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask iuste i a ern a nisnin E pr id 60 0 3 2 Privala IF LE RE OR ER EE EE RN b RP TERME 61 5 9 2 DNS Salvar AGOrESS cssc ies ie GEES SE EES NE PS ER GRANGE Ek sd es EE EE ERG 61 zr dE Ese ET IS ie OE EO OE es siandd vacant 62 Rok ea el EE N De ee IER 62 6 5 1 WAN RIA AAdIGER ee aq e Dad d ete cus 62 6 5 2 WAN Port Mode Dynamic Fixed IP Address
5. No Device Name Status kel Device IP Address Bud iim Application 1 B 3000 OK 60001 10 59 1 30 80 00 0 C5 00 00 05 TCP 2 P662HW OK 60002 10 59 1 62 80 00 A0 C5 01 23 45 TCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 System Status LAN Device Status LABEL DESCRIPTION No This field displays the index number Device Name This field displays the name of the LAN device Click the device name to access web based management interface of the LAN device if the Status field is OK For more information on accessing a LAN device refer to Section 28 7 1 on page 190 Status This field displays the current status of the LAN device It displays OK when the LAN device is turned on and working properly Otherwise it displays Fail Virtual Port This field displays the virtual port number Device IP Address This field displays the IP address of the LAN device Device Server Port This field displays the server port number of the LAN device Device MAC This field displays the MAC address of the LAN device Address Application This field displays the type of application packet that is forwarded to the LAN device 28 7 1 Accessing the LAN Device Before you can access a LAN device behind the VSG the following requirements must be met The LAN device has a web based management interface and it is enabled You have set up the virtual port mapping to the LAN device server port in the LAN
6. Service Selection Page r iv 4 Service Selection Message Purchase Unit Message Notification Message 1 Notification Message 2 Notification Message 3 Enter Payment Information Enter Credit Card Number Enter Credit Card expiration date Enter Email Address Submit Button Additional Customer Data Merchants may provide additional customer information with a transaction based on their respective requirements Customer ID First Last Name Company Address City State Province ZIP Postal Code Country Phone Fax Customize the message for the service selection page Please choose from the following service selection Max 80 characters pow many units of Internet access would you like t Max 80 characters Please kindly note that there will be no refund onc Max 160 characters Please note that the time block of selected service Max 160 characters m Max 160 characters nter Payment Information all info is required Max 160 characters credit card number Max 80 characters credit card expiration date Max 80 characters nter Email Address Max 80 characters Submit Transaction and Login Max 40 characters custo mer ID Max 40 characters Frst Name Last Name Max 20 characters Max 20 characters company Max 40 characters Address Max 40 characters City Max
7. The following table describes the related field in this screen Table 6 System Settings WAN LAN WAN MAC Address FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN MAC Address Select Default to use the factory assigned MAC address If your ISP requires MAC address authentication select Change to and enter the MAC address of a computer on the LAN in the fields provided 6 5 2 WAN Port Mode Dynamic Fixed IP Address Use the WAN LAN screen to change the WAN IP address settings 63 Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 22 System Settings WAN LAN Dynamic Static WAN IP Address LAN WAN MAC Address WAN Port Mode WANILAN IP Address 10 59 11 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default C Changeto 00 DO0 j00 j00 j00 j00 C Get automatically from a DHCP server Use fixed IP address sei IP Address Subnet Mask Default IP Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server C PPPoE Mostly for ADSL modem users C PPTP Mostly for Europe ADSL modem users The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 7 System Settings WAN LAN WAN IP FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN Port Mode Get automatically from a DHCP server Select this option to set the VSG to act as a DHCP client on the WAN The VSG obtains TCP IP information IP address DNS server information etc from a DHCP server Use fixed IP address Select this
8. 67 Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 9 System Settings WAN LAN PPTP continued FIELD DESCRIPTION TCP MSS Setting Enter the size of the Maximum Segment Size MSS Connections ID Name Enter your identification name of the PPTP server assigned to you by the ISP Connect on Demand Select this option when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle timeout in the Max Idle Time field maximum 65535 minutes This is the default setting with an idle timeout of 10 minutes Keep Alive Select this option when you want the Internet connection up all the time and specify a redial period in the Redial Period field maximum 65535 seconds When disconnected the VSG will attempt to bring up the connection after the redial period Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup 68 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 69 Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Server This chapter shows you how to configure the internal web server and set up DHCP settings and email server redirect on the VSG 7 1 DHCP Configuration DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows the individual clients Ethernet device to obtain the TCP IP configuration from a centralized DHCP server The VSG has built in DHCP server capability which means it can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computer systems that
9. 136 Figure 85 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page 137 Figure 86 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page Preview 138 Figure 87 Credit Card Customization Successful Page issie ee Ee Ke EE KAK AE GEE Ad 140 Figure 88 Credit Card Customization Successful Page Preview ees ee ee ee 141 Figure 89 Credit Card Customization Fall Page neret KRAGE PENIS GARS a gn EER SG EE ig 141 Figure 90 Credit Card Customization Fail Page Preview ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 142 Figure 91 Customization Output Bill auae abet Ek EE AA GE EA es He 142 Figure 92 Customization Output Bill Example iis sssssi EERS tta bei ius si atti randa der ERGE 143 Figure 93 Bandwidth Management Activate sese 145 Figure 94 Bandwidth Management Equal Share eese 145 Figure 95 Bandwidth Management Class of Service sess 146 qvo A Foral Fage ai ES EG a dailies 148 ACGUDLESMAIS a d WR S o T 149 Figure 9o Waled GUB sasie odit b a PR ERU HW HASSRAR RR Cb E OA SR LES UU 150 Figure 99 Subscriber Login Screen with Walled Garden Links Example 151 Figure 100 Passthrough Subscriber IP and MAC Address see 153 Figure 101 Passthrough Destination URL and IP irisse rrt rre etn td et nn 154 Ligure T02 Advanced ai ER OE Re OO AO EE AED 156 Figure 10S oi ed EE 158 Figure 104 Privilege User Access Session List Example
10. In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add e Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add e Click OK when finished 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 262 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide e Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them Figure 199 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Altemate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise vou need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate
11. Lease Time Private Specify the time in minutes between 1 and 71582788 a DHCP client is allowed to use an assigned IP address When the lease time expires the DHCP client is given a new unused IP address Primary Secondary DNS IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS server s in the Primary DNS IP Address and or Secondary DNS IP Address fields Note You must specify a DNS server DHCP Server Public Select this option if you want to assign public IP address es to the computer s connected on the LAN port The VSG does not apply NAT on traffic using public IP address assigned on the LAN Note You must obtain more than one public IP address from your ISP You need to configure a billing profile with the public service type see Section 10 1 1 on page 88 IP Pool Start Address Enter the first of the continuous addresses in the public client IP address pool Make sure the IP pool addresses are in the same range as the WAN IP address of the VSG If they are in different IP ranges this feature is disabled If you are given a range of public IP addresses do not include the VSG s WAN IP address in the address pool Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Enter a number not greater than 512 Lease Time Public Specify the time in minutes between 1 and 71582788 a DHCP client is allowed to use an assigned IP address When the lease time expires the DHCP cl
12. iese ee eek ke ee ee 154 Chapter 19 EE UU 156 hari ul M LETS 156 Chapter 20 dil R5 e 158 Pak si Lk ie ER OE ee N 158 20 1 1 Accessing Session List As a Privilege User issie ees ee Ee ee 159 Table of Contents 14 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Chapter 21 LAN COS usi EA REO REGIONI GA T S RAI ABQULA NN GN KG ER TAREA RE E 160 21 1 LAN Devices OVOel VIBIM sesse oe Lp rs pu cia a Se ch GE Letra Re 160 2103 POR WIAD BUG AE EE PEDI dS 160 21 2 Configuring LAN Device Port Mapping iss sessies Ee Re AE Ee Ke KA Ee RA ed Ek Re ed 160 21 2 1 LAN Device Management Example iese se ee ees Ee Re ee Se Ee Re Ge AE ee 162 21 2 2 Specifying an Inside Server Example eene 163 Chapter 22 SUBE ROLE iek e ED MIRO ee HET UMS LEE VASA Ge N Ge RE AERA ane ORONEU REIN Ge IG RR 164 221 talle ROWE OSSE MT 164 22 2 Glate Roule BST es GEE Eg De Ge EG Ke ed gone Oe 164 Chapter 23 Private LAN EO OO OR EE 168 1 Private LAN 8 EE EE Ee N de ON DOE 168 23 2 Configuring a Private LAN iioii cies corta ize b vena atl tora e cbr ia EER DES SEE ERG EIE 168 Chapter 24 colpo qM c T 170 P WEIL ee D asaras 170 CONNU ITE pr E sl EE 170 V NAE EES EE OE EE EE 171 Chapter 25 SARA TER ne N ETT 176 es ES ME ee yir OE ER oT 176 25 11 Configuring Session TACE uses EE ENE SEE BEEN ie KANS EEUE KEER EERS
13. sss 63 0 5 3 WAN Part Modes PPPOE cicoria nienean ei s bee Gee EE REPRE 64 11 Table of Contents VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 6 54 WAN Per Mode PPTP sees esse Yen I ER LE si Ge EPI EX For FU p SS Ld 66 Chapter 7 ilio UM TU nene UP TD ETE 70 Bal BEEF GE DDR EQUO co tete abbr bri i n ee ee EG Pr eb tb GE 70 7 1 1 Public and Private Address Assignment ss se ese ee ee ee ee ee ee se ee 70 Tol Beet OORSEE m Tm 70 Chapter 8 MAT Pool cc qa N n GE EG N M Re PG RE Ge RS NNNM REP 74 MEL 4E EE EE 74 8 11 NAT DENMINONS EE N EAA 74 eLA vet MET DOOS cranar a 75 813 How NAT ie EE OE ort Epi eU ponid arainn FE SEI dO ER 75 wm Esa qme e T T5 BLUT ERAS ss EE ee EE GR ee 76 8 2 1 CIUS MRRI CIA 76 8 2 2 Example 2 MEISIE Lus ecce eid etr ka RP Eu nU daa a AE EL Re ERR da 77 8 2 3 Example 3 One to One and Many to One sss TT 23 NAT Pool SIUD e TS 78 Chapter 9 Fed pt Lee od EE OR 80 RE EE IR EO EI ER cn maa OE STET 80 BEER ei y QE 80 9 1 2 CAS Central Authentication Service ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 80 ER EE ER es OE OE EE EN 81 OA RADU SA 81 2142 RADIUS AO N ES EES Ee Ge BE Ge GE Ee ede 81 9 1 2 2 Vendor SEE AMMDUNS sissies EER ria geo ke ee de N EE EE 82 9 2 Authentication Configuration ii eis ER GE rana da Ge AG Ge Aa ku Sa A AR Ge De AR aad 82 921 Scenano ONIONS qe GE EE GE GE ee cee 85 Chapter 10 ol EE EE N OR ER N OE N 88 QE EM IU ec 88 19
14. 96 Create Static Subscriber Account Mariali rrr ee terae 97 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore sis ee ee ee ee ee n 98 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore File Download 99 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore Save As 99 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore sis esse ee ee ee ee ee 100 Static reel EE OE EE N E 100 Static Account Information Printout Example iss sees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 102 Ee ees LAN OE AE eoo Mit t EO RI EE ee ees 102 Dynamic Account LINKS e 104 Accounting Dynamic Account Setting 105 imi lg dE eee 106 Dynamic Account Operator Panel tpi rrr ah tnb dn Fio d ERR sais 107 Dynamic Account Information Printout Example esses 107 BILE Tees di du 108 Dynamic Account List Backup File Download ees ee ee ee AR ee 109 Dynamic Account List Backup Save AS iuuenes vns baeo RGN ua eben ES DE EG Ida 110 System Setting Port Eoeation Mapping iiie eerie ERG ENGER GEED EG DE SG ie 113 Advanced Setting Credit Card eue EE Ee EA Ge N GEAG GR Ke GE ENE de 117 BE eli eN od Ee s c TM 121 Customizalion Login DUS unisex Se Ge a 122 Subscriber Login Screen Example Standard 122 Customization Login Soren POdilee ise iceii bete rhet net bue EG va ade 122 Customization Login Screen Advanced sss 123 Subscriber
15. Manually Add Subscriber Account No Username Password Billing Profile 1 EI Profile 1 2 oa Profile 1 3 1 sl Profile 1 4 EE HEEN Profile 1 5 EE sd Profile 1 6 C Profile 1 7 NENNEN EE Profile 1 8 Lo y 1 Profile 1 9 Ed Profile 1 10 ol Profile 1 Ed The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 24 Create Static Subscriber Account Manual LABEL DESCRIPTION No This read only field displays the index number of an entry Username Enter the user name for a static subscriber account 97 Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 24 Create Static Subscriber Account Manual continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Enter the password associated with the user name above You may also set the VSG to generate a password automatically refer to Section 11 5 on page 100 Billing Profile From the drop down list box select a billing profile for the static account Note This drop down list box displays active profiles only Refer to Section 10 1 1 on page 88 for more information Apply Click Apply to create the static account s and save the changes 11 4 Static Account List Backup and Restore You can back up and restore static account information in the Create Static Account screen 11 4 1 Backing Up a Static Account List Follow the steps below to back up static
16. Static Account refresh No Username Password Billing Profile Concurrent Access 1 Admin 12345678 None 0 2006 06 21 2 Cindy 12345678 1 Profile 1 1 ROERE GO NE Page I4 First First Login Expiration Status Delete Backup _ Print List Offline n XO one r 4 Previous Next End M Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts 102 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Static Account List LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click Refresh to update this screen Backup Click Backup to backup the account information to a computer Print List Click Print List to print ALL account information on a printer connected to the computer you use to access the web configurator Note This does NOT display a print preview window No This field displays the index number Username This field displays the account user name Click the heading to sort the entries in ascending or descending order based on this column Password This field displays the account password Billing Profile This field displays the name of the profile associated to the account Concurrent This field displays the number of users are currently using this account for Internet Access access First Login This field displays the time a subscriber logs in using the account Expiration This field displays the time the account becomes invalid Sta
17. Enter a numeric between 1 and 3 32 9 1 Firmware Upgrade Note You MUST run a TFTP server on a computer where a firmware file is stored to upgrade the firmware on the VSG You MUST have a WAN LAN connection between the VSG and the TFTP server computer at the same time Follow the steps below to configure the TFTP settings in the SMT 1 Connect the computer directly to the VSG through the console port Refer to the section on establishing a console port connection for more information 2 In the SMT main menu type 5 and press ENTER to display the Utilities Menu screen 3 Type 1 and press ENTER to display the Firmware Upgrade screen 4 Enter the IP address of the computer running the TFTP server in the TFTP Server IP Address field 5 Specify the name of the firmware file in the Download Filename field Figure 172 SMT Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Address 172 21 4 72 Download Filename vsgl200v105 bin E xecute Download R eturn to Main Menu M odify Enter Selection Enter the command key and press enter 225 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 6 Type E at the Enter Selection prompt to get the firmware file from the TFTP server Figure 173 SMT Firmware Upgrade Process Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Address 172 21 4 72 Download Filename vsg1200v105 bin kkkxkkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkx
18. NMS Address Enter the IP address of the management station Privileges Select a privilege level from the drop down list box Options are Read Write Trap Recipient and All Status Select Valid to activate the selected SNMP configuration entry Select Invalid to disable the selected SNMP configuration entry Apply Click Apply to save the changes Chapter 26 SNMP 180 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 181 Chapter 26 SNMP VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 27 Miscellanea This chapter shows you how to configure TCP IP to RS 232 convertor settings on the VSG to extend the connection to the account statement printer 27 1 Overview In cases where you need to install the VSG and the statement print in different locations and the RS 232 console cable is not long enough for the connection you can use a TCP IP RS 232 convertor to make an extension The TCP IP RS 232 convertor is a hardware device installed between the VSG and the statement printer on the LAN The following figure shows a network example where the VSG connects to the statement printer via the TCP IP RS 232 convertor Figure 120 Network Example Using TCP IP RS232 Convertor e l LAN Ethernet RS 232 27 2 TCP IP RS 232 Converter Setup Configure the TCP IP RS 232 converter settings in the Miscellanea screen Click Advanced Setup and Miscellanea to display the screen as shown Chapter 27 Miscellanea 182 VSG 1
19. No Active Name Description Profile Setting 01 v Profile 1 1 day 10 00 Edit EE Edit EE Edit EE Edit EE Edit Eg eat EET Edit EE Edit EE Edit Edit 02 03 04 05 06 oF 08 09 EKLENEN GL KET aa aa 10 Chapter 10 Billing 88 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 System Setting Billing Billing Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Currency Specify the type of currency and or dollar sign for billing Number of decimal Specify the number of decimal places for the currency The default is 2 places No This field displays the index number of a billing profile Active Select this check box to enable the billing profile Name This field displays the name of a billing profile Description This field displays a description of a billing profile Profile Setting Click Edit to edit the selected billing profile Refer to Section 10 1 2 on page 89 for more information Apply Click Apply to save the changes 10 1 2 Configuring a Billing Profile To edit a billing profile click the Edit button in the Billing Profile screen to display the configuration screen for the selected billing profile Figure 38 System Settings Billing Billing Profile Setting Billing Profile Setting No 1 Name Profile 1 Description day 10 00 Price Duration C
20. Page M First 4 Previous Next gt End MI The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 System Status Billing Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click Refresh to update the screen Export to Txt File Click Export to File to back the billing logs Refer to Section 28 8 1 on page 192 for instructions Clear Log Click Clear Log to clear all log entries No This field displays the index number of the entry Username This field displays the user name or the room number for Dynamic PMS or Static Location accounts only Billing Profile This field displays the name of the billing profile an account is using Log Time This field displays the time the subscriber logged in using the account Usage Time This field displays the time period allocated for an account Bill This field displays the amount of money charged for the time unit s purchased Charge from This field displays the type of the account billing Dynamic PMS or Static Status This field displays the billing status or account status Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page 191 Chapter 28 System Status VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 67 System Status Billing Log continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Next Click Next to go t
21. Scenario 3 The Subscriber IP address is the same as the IP address of a network device The following figure depicts an example where the subscriber IP address is the same as the IP address of a network device not attached to the VSG Figure 180 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 3 Computer 2 IP 192 168 1 10 Router LY Computer 1 IP 192 168 1 10 You must set the VSG to use different LAN and WAN IP addresses on different subnets if you enable DHCP server on the VSG For example you set the WAN IP address to 192 59 1 1 and the LAN IP address to 10 59 1 1 Otherwise It is recommended the VSG use a public WAN IP address Scenario 4 Two or more subscribers have the same IP address By converting all private IP addresses to the WAN IP address the VSG allows subscribers with different network configurations to access the Internet However there are situations where two or more subscribers are using the same private IP address This may happen when a subscriber is configured to use a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address the VSG DHCP server assigns to another subscriber acting as a DHCP client In this case the subscribers are not able to access the Internet 237 Appendix B IP Address Assignment Conflicts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 181 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 4 Computer 2 IP 192 168 1 10 N REEN CUR Sy eN N 2 Internet GER aS sel Er wy VSG Ro
22. 3000000 Password 3000000 Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 Username 20000000 Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 Signature Close Print This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service 2006 6 16 14 45 06 Figure 76 Static Account with PMS Billing Printout Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username JOOOOOOOC Password 30000000 Thank you very much 131 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 77 Static Account Printout Statement Printer Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username ooooooo Password oooooo Usage Time Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 CUT CUT CUT Username ooooooo Password x oooooo Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 2006 6 16 14 48 23 Figure 78 Static Account with PMS Billing Printout Statement Printer Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username 000000 Password ooooooo Thank you very much Chapter 15 Customization 132 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 79 Dynamic Account
23. Disable C Enable No Start IP End IP Max 50 IPs EERGMEG NAT Pool Address List Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 System Settings NAT Pool LABEL DESCRIPTION Disable Select this option to deactivate this feature Subscribers are not be able to establish multiple connections simultaneously to the same VPN server that has the single connection per source limitation Enable Select this option to perform address translation on the WAN to allow subscribers to establish simultaneous connections to the same VPN server that has the single connection per source limitation You must then configure the address pool for VPN connections Chapter 8 NAT Pool 78 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 16 System Settings NAT Pool continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Start End IP Specify the beginning and ending IP addresses of the address pool in the fields provided and click Add to List The following shows three NAT pool examples if the VSG is using a WAN public IP address of 211 21 21 1 Group 1 211 21 21 2 211 21 21 6 five IP addresses Group 2 211 21 21 20 211 21 21 29 ten IP addresses Group 3 211 21 21 60 211 21 21 69 ten IP addresses Group 4 211 21 21 75 211 21 21 76 two IP addresses Note You can configure up to ten address pools each pool can contain up to 50 addresses on the VSG No This read only
24. P Log OFF o Turn Off Computer untitled Paint 2 For Windows XP click Network Connections For Windows 2000 NT click Network and Dial up Connections Figure 195 Windows XP Control Panel amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sad o X d PO Search gt Folders E Address gt Control Panel v Control Panel A 2 E mm Add Hardware Qe Switch to Category view Co ons See Also A Windows Update Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 260 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 196 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties s Network Connections File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sax 2 Search e Folders Ez 5 e Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal Area Connection nabled Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte amp Create a new connection f Set up a home or small Disable office network amp Disable this network teas device Repair W Repair this connection Bridge Connections sl Rename this connection view status of this connection Change settings of this Rename connection Create Shortcut Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and click Properties Figure 197 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 4 Local Area Connection Properti
25. PIN NO MNEMONIC FUNCTION PIN 1 Console 1 DCD Received Line Signal Detector to the VSG il 2 TXT Transmitted Data from the VSG 3 RXT Received Data to the VSG iii 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready from the VSG 5 GND Signal Ground Common 6 DSR Data Set Ready to the VSG 7 RTS Request to Send from the VSG 8 CTS Clear to Send to the VSG 9 RI Ring Indicator to the VSG DB25 Male to DB9 Male Connector Figure 190 DB25 Male to DB9 Male Connector Q 1 e on m al a es 13 O Table 99 DB25 Male to DB9 Male Connector Ping Assignment U c U N ole sola el N s 22 Appendix F Cable Types and Cable Pin Assignments 254 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 255 Appendix F Cable Types and Cable Pin Assignments VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to co
26. Please active your account before Description M Account Create Time Accumulation M Ending M Serial Number O Preview of PC connected printer for static account printout Q Preview of account generator printer with static account printout Q Preview of PC connected printer for dynamic account printout Q Preview of account generator printer with dynamic account printout Account Printout Customization Title MWeleamel S S Max 23 Subtitle This is your account information please keep this for y Max 80 Username semam SU O Password Pasw Usage Time sageTme Billing Method Bing Billing Profile Description Pote Purchase Unit PuchasseUnt 7 Additional Label 1 ESSID Value Max 223 7 Additional Label 2 MEP Value Max23 M Price Foa Expire Date Time vyyy mm dd 7 HH mm ss gt HH 24h hh 12h tt AM PM After your first logged in please finish your usage time within Thank you very much Max 23 4h hh 12h tt AM PM E Max 72 I Max 96 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Customization Account Printout LABEL DESCRIPTION Title Enter a title up to 24 characters for the printout Subtitle Enter a subtitle up to 80 characters for the printout Username Enter the label name for the field displaying the account username 129
27. Select Statement Printer if you want to print the account information using a statement printer connected to the CONSOLE port on the VSG Select PC Connected Printer if you want to print the account information using a printer connected to a network computer Click on the O icon to display a print preview Apply Click Apply to save the settings 11 3 Creating a Static Account Click System Settings Accounts Static Accounts and Create Static Account to display the screen as shown next Figure 42 System Settings Create Static Subscriber Account This feature can automatically Prefix information file to your system Backup Restore Static Accounts can be created and managed by a series of specific number like hotel rooms Static accounts reside in the flash memory all the time Generate a batch of static accounts Postfix To 0 Maximum 5 numbers Billing Profile Profile 1 7 Random Password Length 8 7 Note For PMS billing type use only numbers for subscriber accounts Static Accounts backup and restore This feature can backup the account information to your computer or restore a previously saved account Create Static Account generate a series of specific numbers of accounts like hotel rooms From 0 Maximum 5 numbers Click to save the account information to your computer To restore a previously saved account information file to your system select this option locate the ac
28. Super subscriber is a built in subscriber account for system test or premium usage Super Subscriber Disable Idle Time Out 5s Min s 1 1440 Username super Password 4 Confirm sid The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 3 System Tools System Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This account permits full access to all system configurations Account Username Enter the user name for the administrative account The default is admin Password Enter a new administrative account password The default is 1234 Confirm Enter the new administrator password again for confirmation Account Manager This account allows you to set up subscriber accounts No system configuration is allowed Username Enter the user name for the account manager account The default is account Password Enter a new account manager password The default is account Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 46 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 3 System Tools System Account continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Confirm Enter the new administrator password again for confirmation Supervisor Account This account allows you to view device status only Username Enter the user name for the supervisor account The default is supervisor Password Enter a new supervisor password The default is supervisor Confirm Enter the new administrator password again for confirmation Su
29. You can customize the subscriber login page according to your business needs The advanced settings allow you to include welcome messages a company logo and basic formatting Dual function Console Port The VSG provides a console port for local management You can also set this console port to act as the printer port when connected to an external statement printer Web Configurator Management The VSG comes with an embedded web based configurator It offers advanced management features and allows you to manage the VSG remotely using Internet Explorer version 5 5 or above or Netscape version 6 0 or later System Maintenance The firmware of the VSG can be upgraded via the web configurator or the SMT menu The Embedded FTP server is for firmware upgrades as well as configuration file backups and restoration 1 3 Applications The following sections describe network application examples in which the VSG is used 1 3 1 Internet Access for LAN Networks With a broadband service account set up the VSG allows the attached computers to enjoy high speed Internet access Figure 1 Application Internet Access for LAN Networks NN San hs Se z c 35 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 1 3 2 Internet Access in Public Areas In public areas such as a hotel the VSG provides high speed Internet access to subscribers Account billing and authentication can be done either using a
30. 1 Admin 2 Cindy GO hz Page No Username Show Password Re Generate Password ALL Status Concurrent Access Print Static Account Operator Print List Re Generate Password Offline 0 2 Re Generate Password Online 1 M First 4 Previous Next gt End M The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Static Account Operator LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to update the screen Print List Click this button to print a list of all subscriber accounts No This read only field displays the index number of an entry Username This read only field displays the account user name Click the heading to sort the entries in ascending or descending order Hide Password Show Password Click Hide Password to not display the passwords for the accounts on the screen Click Show Password to display the passwords for the accounts on the screen Re Generate You may set the VSG to generate a new password for each account Password Click All to set the VSG to generate new passwords for all accounts Click Re Generate Password to set the VSG to generate a new password for the corresponding account Status This field indicates whether the account is currently in use Online or not Offline Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts 100 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 25 Static Account Operator continued LABEL DESC
31. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab Ifyour IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 192 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address Bindings Advanced Neelos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Specify an IP address luu dee mu Egg SumeMee TL v Detect connection to network media Cancel 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab If you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS Ifyou know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 258 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 193 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuratio
32. Always ask before opening this type of file Cancel Mote info 3 Select Save this file to disk and click OK A Save As window displays 197 Chapter 29 Configuration VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 136 Configuration Backup Save As bens TE Save in Amy Documents 8 e E3 Corel User Files History I My eBooks LJ My Library f dar Cf My Pictures Desktop My Documents In Nu My Computer Fio nane Save as type cfg Document Fe taxe My Network P 4 Specify the file name and or location and click Save to start the backup process 29 2 1 Configuration Backup Using TFTP 1 Click System Tools and Configuration A screen displays as shown next 2 Inthe Backup section enter the IP address of the TFTP server in dotted decimal notation in the TFTP Server IP Address field 3 Specify a file name for the configuration backup in the Text File Name field Figure 137 Configuration Backup using TFTP Configuration Backup TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Restore To restore your stored system configuration to this device File Path Browse TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Eo Reset the system back to factory defaults Keep subscriber profile Keep port location mapping profile This feature can import your saved settings to this device or export the stored settings from this device to your PC Click B
33. CLASS NATURAL MASK A 255 0 0 0 B 255 255 0 0 C 255 255 255 0 Subnetting With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 1s equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 103 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 124 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 125 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 126 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 127 1110 0000 224 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting 270 P 660HW T v2 Users Guide Table 103 Alternative Subnet Ma
34. Chapter 32 Using The SMT 216 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 32 4 1 The Navigation Keys The following table describes the keystrokes that you use in the SMT screens Table 72 SMT Control Key Descriptions KEY DESCRIPTION ENTER To go to the selected menu ESC In any SMT screen press ESC and enter Y yes to discard any changes and return to the main screen TAB To move to the next configuration field SPACE To toggle between field choices 32 5 System Configuration Use the System Configuration menu to set general system settings such as the system name the domain name or change the console port speed From the Main Menu screen type 1 and press ENTER to display the menu as shown Figure 165 SMT System Configuration System Configuration System Name Doamin Name Console Port Speed 9600 Web Server Port 80 E Mail Server Redirect The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 73 SMT System Configuration FIELD DESCRIPTION System Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters for identification purposes Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the VSG may obtain a domain name from a DHCP server The domain name you entered is given priority over the DHCP server assigned domain name Console Port Enter 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 to set the Spee
35. End IP If you want to specify one IP address enter the same IP address as in the Start IP field If you want to specify a range of IP addresses enter the last IP address in the range Add to List Click Add to List to save the settings to the table below No This read only field displays the index number of an entry Chapter 20 Privilege User 158 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 50 Privilege User FIELD DESCRIPTION Address List This field displays one or a range of privilege IP address es Delete Click Delete to remove the selected IP address es Apply Click Apply to save the changes 20 1 1 Accessing Session List As a Privilege User On the computer whose IP address is included in the Privilege User screen enter http VSG IP getSessionList cgi where VSG IP is the WAN or LAN IP address of the VSG in the web browser The Session List screen displays Refer to Section 28 5 on page 188 for the field descriptions The following figure shows an example where the WAN IP address of the VSG is 172 23 37 16 Figure 104 Privilege User Access Session List Example 3 http 172 23 37 16 getSessionList cgi Microsoft Internet Explorer lani xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Back MENT A Qsearch Favorites meda lt 4 D SO S Address hetp 172 23 37 16 getSessionlisticgh sl ee us Sessi
36. Enter the size of a Maximum Transmission Unit MTU TCP MSS Setting Enter the size of the Maximum Segment Size MSS At the S ave and return R eturn without saving M odify prompt type S and press ENTER to save the changes and return to the previous screen type R and press ENTER to discard all changes and return to the previous screen or type M and press ENTER to continue configuring the fields Restart the device when prompted Press ESC and enter Y to stop any actions in the current screen and return to the previous screen All changes will be discarded 32 6 3 WAN Type PPTP To activate PPTP support on the VSG enter T in the WAN Type field to display the WAN Configuration screen as shown next Refer to the related web configurator section for background information Chapter 32 Using The SMT 220 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 168 SMT WAN Configuration PPTP WAN Configuration WAN Type D S P T T Local IP Address Local Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Server IP Address Username Password Connect Setting C K C ax idle Time Min 10 Optional Setting Connection ID Name PPP MTU Setting 1460 TCP MSS setting 1400 The following table describes the PPTP related fields in this menu Table 76 SMT WAN Configuration PPTP FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN Type D S P T Enter T to enable PPTP support Local IP Address Enter the static
37. IP address assigned to you by your ISP for the WAN interface Local Subnet Enter the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given for the WAN Mask interface Gateway IP Type the IP address of the gateway device if given Address Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the PPTP server Username Enter the login user name assigned to you by your ISP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Connect Setting C K Enter C Connect on demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout Setting field This is the default selection Enter K Keep alive when you want your connection up all the time and specify the redial time in the Redial Period field to set how long the VSG waits before trying to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Redial Period Sec The field is only visible when you select K in the Connect Setting field Type the time in seconds that elapses before the VSG automatically attempts to reconnect to the PPTP server The default is 30 seconds Max Idle Time Setting This field is only visible when you select C in the Connect Setting field Type the time in minutes that elapses before the VSG automatically disconnects from the PPTP server The default is 10 minutes Optional Setting Connection ID Name If your ISP has provided a connection ID nam
38. Log in E Log out Usage Time A C E With RADIUS authentication you can define vendor specific attributes VSAs in addition to the set of standard RADIUS attributes defined in RFC 2865 and RFC 2866 A VSA is an attribute value pair that is sent between a RADIUS server and the VSG It is necessary you define the VSAs on the RADIUS sever if you want the VSG to perform the following Limit Download bandwidth per subscriber Limit Upload bandwidth per subscriber Limit Total traffic bandwidth allowed per subscriber Specify advertising web site per subscriber Enable disable SMTP redirect Note Before you can make use of these functions on the VSG configure the proprietary VSAs on the RADIUS server Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server for more information See Appendix D on page 242 for more information on the VSAs 9 2 Authentication Configuration To configure the subscriber authentication method click System Settings and Authentication to display the screen as shown next Chapter 9 Authentication 82 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 32 System Settings Authentication Authentication Configuration Authentication T ER TEE No Authentication C User Agreement C Redirect URL Link Code Standard User Agreement page C Built in Authentication Three pre configured options are provided for easy setup Select an option that best suits your network needs You must the
39. NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your VSG filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 8 1 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The VSG keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so
40. Redirect Page URL Specify the URL of the user agreement page in the field provided Click Link Code to display the HTML source code of a default sample page Standard User Select this option to use the pre configured user agreement page on the Agreement Page VSG Built in Authentication Select this option to authenticate the subscribers using the local subscriber database Then click Select option to choose a per configured setting in the Current Preset option field Note When you select this option you must also configure the Billing and Accounting screens Current preset option This field is available when you select Built in Authentication This field displays the current pre configured setting for the built in authentication To select a predefined option click Select option to open the Scenario Guide screen refer to Figure 33 on page 86 RADIUS Select this option to authenticate subscribers using a remote RADIUS server Then configure the following fields Check Local Account First Select this option to have the VSG authenticate a subscriber using the local user database first If the account information is not found then the VSG authenticates subscribers using the RADIUS server s specified Clear this check box to have the VSG authenticate subscribers using the RADIUS server s only Accumulation Select this option for multiple re login until the time allocated is used up If a subscriber logs out and a
41. Verify that Ethernet cable length does not exceed 100 meters 4 Make sure the network adapters are working on the attached devices Chapter 33 Troubleshooting 230 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 33 1 3 The WAN Port LEDs None of the LEDs for the WAN port light up when connected to an Ethernet device Table 81 Troubleshooting the WAN LED STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Verify that the attached device s is turned on and properly connected to the VSG 2 Verify that Ethernet cable length does not exceed 100 meters Make sure the network adapters are working on the attached devices 33 2 The Console Port I cannot access the VSG through the console port Table 82 Troubleshooting Console Port STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check to see if the VSG is connected to your computer using a console cable 2 Check to see if the communications program is configured correctly Set the communication parameters as stated here Emulation auto detect Baud Rate 9600 bps No Parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Flow Control None Make sure you entered the correct username and password The default administrator username is admin and the default password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive If you have forgotten the administrator user name and or password you must reset the VSG back to the factory defaults using the reset button Use a pointed object to
42. You can specify the IP address or the URL of the web site s that any user can access without entering a user name or password Figure 101 Passthrough Destination URL and IP IP Address No IP Address No IP Address 1 13 ss 25 isd 2 14 ss 26 3 aa 15 EE 2 4 16 28 fc 1 5 EN 17 29 Sj B p 4 18 1 30 1 7 o 19 ooo 31 1 8 20 75 32 EE 9 TT 21 38 FEE x 10 EE 22 34 Es 11 EE i 23 l 35 SI 12 24 EI 36 r 1 Destination IP Address Passthrough Destination URL Passthrough URL Link Page The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 48 Passthrough Destination URL and IP FIELD DESCRIPTION Destination IP Address Passthrough No This read only field displays the index number of an entry IP Address Enter the IP address of a web site in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 10 Pass Through Destination URL Chapter 18 Passthrough 154 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 48 Passthrough Destination URL and IP continued FIELD DESCRIPTION No This read only field displays the index number of an entry URL Link Page Enter the web site address for example http www zyxel com 155 Chapter 18 Passthrough VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Filter This chapter shows you how to co
43. fields to the defaults x Fron ai p Period Time finish 4 TE 8 Click Apply and Close to save Cina a the settings Period Time finish Ergel oh month BI Tofio Expire when 01 00 00 7 C Unlimited BI Bandwidth Note You must activate the bandwidth management feature and select a class of service Limit Maximum Upstream Bandwidth amp 4Kops C 0 Kbps 6424576 Maximum Downstream Bandwidth 256Kbps C D Kbps 6424578 Service Private Service Type Public Service cu a 9 In the Billing Profile screen you should see the name of the Currency Number of decimals places 2 profile you have just created Select Active to enable it and click Apply to save the settings Billing Profile No Active Name Description Profile Setting 01 iv Profile 1 1 day 10 00 Edt EE 03 n Edit EE uj o E 4 4 Setting User Authentication Method You want to configure the VSG to check user account information against the account information stored on its database 1 In the web configurator click System Setting gt Authentication 2 Select Built in Authentication and use the default scenario settings 3 Click Apply to save the settings Authentication Configuration Authentication Type m C No Authentication C User Agreement C Redirect URL Link Code Standard User Agreement page
44. 000000 View Color Grid Article Back d Col es icle Background Color d C FFFFFF View Color Grid Information Comments The following table describes the related fields Table 33 Customization Login Screen Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Advanced Select this option to set the VSG to display the advanced subscriber login Screen Welcome Slogan Enter a welcome message up to 80 characters long in the text box provided Page Background Select None to set the background color of the login screen to white FFFFFF the default Select Background Color to set the color of the login screen background to the color specified for example enter 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values Article Enter a block of text up to 1024 characters long in the text box This is useful for advertisements or announcements Article Text Color Select None to set the article text color of the login screen to white the default Select and set the color of the article text block background to the color specified for example enter 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values 123 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 33 Customization Login Screen Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Article Backgrou
45. 11 BC FONE ie SE CH REFER RARE EG EE RI e ERR d ED eR RM E Pru 88 30 1 2 Configuring e Biling POTE sesse SR N erba teria eu E bla eR aak ELA cui 89 10 2 PMS Property Management System use sies se ee kes See kke ee ee cient nha ee 91 10 2 1 PoreLocauon Mapping is EERS TRO AE ERG Ge EG ks Ge Gee Ge GEE EG OE 91 jag ker RR 91 10 3 Types or Subscriber Accounts is ke serta AA kk RR Ra A RR ER Ru Rai Ek N 93 Table of Contents 12 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Chapter 11 Statie SUDSCNDEr ACCOM Mem 94 11 1 Static Subscriber Account Overview issie se ek Ek Sk AA ek KA ee aenea nnn 94 11 2 Global Static Account SES rs SEER EER GENE EER GENE Ea ERG SR GES NG ESE EER Ee 94 113 Creating 8 Statie Ee Pi usos ceti ert basa Ronde tra eti ptg ee 95 11 3 1 Generating Static Accounts Automatically ssesss 96 11 3 2 Creating Static Subscriber Accounts Manually sessss 97 11 4 Static Account List Backup and Restore iss ee ee ee ee ee ER Ee Re eke ee ee 98 11 4 1 Backing Up a Static Account LISE 22cm reticere tuer GEE ESE EEN 98 115 2 Restoring s Staic Account LISE irse be ttr ERE ER rtr tI ener 99 11 3 Editing Subscriber rerc gc EG GES GE EG EG EG OR ES GE EGGO EE 100 11 5 1 Static Account Information Print Preview iese sessies ee ee see Se ee se ke ee ee 101 11 6 Viewing the Static Account LISE side Do edere opo act nda 102 Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber ACCOUIMDS soe RENE Vea bana boit ke EA
46. 122 System Status System System Host Name Domain Name Bootrom Version 1 00 System Status Firmware Version 1 00 02 Concurrent Users Limitation 1024 WAN MAC Address 00 13 49 7D 39 A1 LAN MAC Address 00 13 49 7D 39 A0 WAN Port Mode Get automatically from a DHCP server IP Address 172 23 37 16 WAN IP Settings Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default IP Gateway 172 23 37 254 Primary DNS Server 172 23 5 2 DNS Secondary DNS Server 172 23 5 1 DHCP Status Server Start IP Address Private 10 59 1 2 DHCP End IP Address Private 10 59 1 254 Lease Time Private 1440 E Mail Server IP Address Country OO State Local State Local City Local j Chapter 28 System Status 184 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide SSL Certificate H A EE RS cdi a State Local State Local City Local City Organization Local Group Organization Unit Local Host Common Name 1 1 1 1 Email Address mail 1 1 1 1 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 61 System Status System FIELD DESCRIPTION System Status Host Name This field displays the description name of the VSG for identification purposes Domain Name This field displays the domain name of the VSG User Limitation Bootrom This field displays the version of the bootrom Version Firmware This field displays the version of the firmware on the VSG Version Concurrent This field dis
47. 16 1 coi Microson Taere Hne E Ipixl Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help em gt Gad Quero Grot ee r Sm Sl E Address amp ws gt eo Welcome Username Password Enter Cancel ZyXEL Communications Corp Google Copyright c 2004 2002 AII Rights Reserved E Done EE loca intranet 7 151 Chapter 17 Portal Page Advertisement Link and Walled Garden VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Passthrough This chapter shows you how to set up computer and web site passthrough 18 1 Passthrough Overview There are two types of pass through you can set up on the VSG by device or by web site address You can set the VSG to allow specific computers based on the IP or MAC address to access the Internet without prompting for a user name and password To allow global access to web sites specify the web site address by IP address or URL that any user can access without logging in This 1s similar to the walled garden feature but without displaying the web site link s in the subscriber login screen You have to inform the users about which web sites they can access for free To configure passthrough on the VSG click Advanced and then Passthrough 18 2 Computer IP and MAC Address Passthrough You can specify the IP or MAC address es of a computer that can access the Internet without entering a user name and password This feature is useful for example if you want to set up computers to provide
48. 168 1 10 Enter the time interval in minutes between 5 and 1440 the VSG waits before sending the session information to the TFTP server s Note If there are 50 session trace records the VSG sends the session information to the TFTP server even if the time interval is not up Apply Click Apply to save the settings 25 1 2 Session Trace Filename Convention The subscriber session information is stored a plain text file with a txt filename extension The general structure of the filename is hostname DDMMY YHHMMSS txt For example MIS221004131543 txt is the file name of a session information file created at 13 15 43 PM on October 22 2004 on a VSG with a hostname of MIS You can view the subscriber session trace information using any text editor The following figure shows an example of the session information file the VSG sends to a TFTP server Figure 117 Session Trace Information Example Host Nam User Nam Dat VLANId SourceIP SourceMac SourcePort DestIP DestPort MIS Cindy 220ct04130403 192 168 1 10 0085A0010104 3974 192 168 1 1 80 MIS Cindy 220ct04130404 192 168 1 10 0085A0010104 3977 172 20 0 63 53 MIS Cindy 220ct04130440 192 168 1 10 0085A0010104 3991 172 20 0 27 80 The following table describes the fields in a session information file Table 58 Session Trace File Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Host Name This is the host or system name of the VSG User Name This is the
49. 40 characters State Province z Max 40 characters z1P Postal Code Max 40 characters Country Max 40 characters Phone 3 Max 40 characters Fax Max 40 characters Q Preview of Service Selection Page The following table describes the labels in this screen 137 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 39 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Selection Page Customize the message for the service selection page Specify the service selection messages in the fields provided Service Selection Messages Enter a message to instruct the subscribers to select a billing profile Purchase Unit Enter a message to instruct the subscribers to select the number of time units to Message purchase Notification Enter additional message s regarding the replenish feature For example you Message 1 3 may enter a refund policy Enter Payment Enter the heading label name to prompt for the payment information Information Enter Credit Enter the label name of a field in which subscribers enter the credit card number Card Number Enter Credit Enter the label name of a field in which subscribers enter the expiration date of the Card expiration credit card date Enter Email Enter the field label for the subscriber s e mail address The VSG sends the Address subscriber account info
50. 78 VSA 82 85 242 format 243 related error messages 244 vendor ID 85 VSG reset to factory defaults 227 W walled garden 34 149 example 150 important note 150 WAN port 40 cable pin assignment 252 WAN port the 252 warranty note 7 web configurator 35 42 configuration menu 44 idle timeout 43 menu summary 44 navigation panel 43 supported browser 35 web redirect 34 web server port 218 winipcfg 259 Index 282
51. 98 109 dynamic 93 104 expiration 108 printout 129 restore 98 static 93 94 types 93 subscriber account first login 103 subscriber authentication 120 subscriber database 34 subscriber login 240 information window 240 subscriber login page 35 subscriber login screen credit card billing 135 customize 120 standard 121 synchronization check file 205 synchronization file 204 205 example 204 syntax convention 30 Syslog 170 on the LAN 171 on the WAN 171 Syslog server 171 Syslog settings 170 system information 184 System Management Terminal See SMT System Management Terminal SMT 214 system name 56 system reset 33 40 47 system setup 56 system status 184 248 T TCP IP components 256 TCP IP protocol 257 TCP IP settings 256 TFTP server 205 throughput 235 Time to Finish 81 84 trademarks 2 transaction key 118 trap port 180 traps 179 troubleshooting 230 console port 231 Internet access 232 LAN port LEDs 230 Power LED 230 statement printer 233 WAN port LEDs 231 Web Configurator 232 Web Configurator display 232 U uplink port 253 User Agreement 84 V Vendor Specific Attribute 242 See VSA vendor specific attributes VSAs 82 ventilation 38 ventilation hole 41 virtual port 160 161 190 Virtual Private Network 75 Virtual Private Network VPN 33 VLAN 177 VLAN enabled switch 112 281 Index VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide VPN connection type 34 single connection per source limitation 76
52. Account Operator Panel screen see Figure 55 on page 107 105 Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 27 Accounting Dynamic Account Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Billing Profile Select a billing profile to associate to the web based SP buttons from the drop down list box Only the activated billing profiles are displayed Refer to Section 10 1 1 on page 88 for more information on creating billing profiles General Settings Flexible Digit Specify how many characters digits the VSG uses for the generated account username and password Unused Accounts Specify the number of hours to wait before the VSG deletes an inactive dynamic account Printout copy Select the number of copies 1 to 3 to print from the drop down list box Click Customize printout text to configure the printout page Print to Select Statement Printer if you want to print the account information using a statement printer connected to the CONSOLE port on the VSG Select PC Connected Printer if you want to print the account information using a printer connected to a network computer Click the Q icon to display a print preview Refer to Section 15 4 on page 129 for more information Apply Click Apply to save the changes The following figure shows the button labels on the SP 200 Figure 54 SP 200 Button Labels die 12 3 Creating Dy
53. Button Enter the label name for the button subscribers click to close this screen Preview of Fail Page Click Preview of Fail Page for a preview screen see Figure 90 on page 142 for an example The following figure shows an example Figure 90 Credit Card Customization Fail Page Preview SORRY your card could not be processed at this time Please use your backspace button and try again with a different credit card Welcome Welcome Credit Card Number Fail Thank you Try Again Close 15 7 Bill Output In a hotel you have the option of printing a separate bill for Internet access service in a hotel room You can customize how the bill will printout in the Output Bill Customization screen Click Advanced Setting Customization and the Output Bill link to display the screen as shown Figure 91 Customization Output Bill Iv Title Room No Service Unit Price M Purchased Time M Ending O Preview Output Bill Customization Internet Access Bill a Y Max224 3 Room Max 10 Bervice Max 10 Unit Max 10 Total Max 10 yyyy mm dd v HH mm ss o Thank you very much E x22 Chapter 15 Customization 142 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Customization Output Bill LABEL DESCRIPTION Title Select this checkbox to display this field and enter the fiel
54. Card VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 30 Advanced Setting Credit Card continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Merchant Select Need if a password is required for the Authroize net account Then enter Password the password exactly as you received it from Authorize Net in the Password field Merchant Then enter the transaction key exactly as you received it from Authorize Net Transaction The transaction key is similar to a password The Authorize Net gateway uses the Key transaction key to authenticate transactions Payment Enter the address of the Authorize Net gateway The default value is https Gateway cardpresent authorize net gateway transact dll Note You don t need to change this address unless instructed by Authorize net administrator Email Select this check box to have the VSG e mail the subscriber the information that Additional you specify in the following fields Information Merchant Select this check box to have the VSG include the company name in the e mail Name that it sends to the subscriber Enter the company name up to 40 characters in the field provided Username and Select this check box to have the VSG e mail the subscriber the subscriber user Password name and password Usage Time Select this check box to have the VSG e mail the subscriber the amount of usage time purchased i Validate Select this option if you have a payment account from iValidate Merchant ID Enter the merch
55. IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10Turn on your VSG 1200 V2 and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel 263 Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 200 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu E File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator gt Chooser Control Panels Favorites d Key Caps Network Browser G Recent Applications il Recent Documents rif Remote Access Status Scrapbook 49 Sherlock 2 j Speakable Items Stickies 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk ColorSync Control Strip Date amp Time DialAssist Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Ex
56. Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to www localhost com Issued by www localhost com Valid from 11 5 2002 to 11 2 2012 4 Click Install Certificate to install the certificate to your computer A Certificate Import Wizard window displays Click Next 209 Chapter 31 SSL Certificate VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 155 Installing the SSL Security Certificate Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Import Wizard Wizard certificate store certificates are kept To continue click Next E x Welcome to the Certificate Import This wizard helps you copy certificates certificate trust lists and certificate revocation lists from your disk to a A certificate which is issued by a certification authority is a confirmation of your identity and contains information used to protect data or to establish secure network connections A certificate store is the system area where 5 Accept the default or specify the location to store the certificate Click Next Figure 156 Certificate Import Wizard Location xl Certificate Store Certificate stores are system areas where certificates are kept Windows can automatically select a certificate store or you can specify a location For C Place all certificates in the Following store Certificate stare 6 Click Finish to
57. Kees se 198 29 3 Restore COD ure oa esse Ri ea EA ER AA eN ln AA Ge AA el Ee ed AU 199 28 9 1 Restore Configuration Using TE TE GEE GEREG SG ERENS Ee EEN SGA RE Ek 199 29 4 Reset tothe Factory Defaulis ERG Ee N EG EN EG NE Re Eoo wanes 200 Chapter 30 EA MO senescent ieee 202 30 1 Firmware ORE AE N OR OR N OE 202 30 2 Manual Firmware Upgrade uncia iden GOS GEN Ge ES ee EE Eg Ee 202 30 2 1 Manual Firmware Upgrade via a TFTP Server sees ees sees ees ee se ee 203 30 3 Scheduled Finials Upgrade EE OE OO Ie AL OE 204 Chapter 31 SSL SCOPE TI e Ee N GE ke GR a a n Ee 206 cammino adii MEE 206 FLIT OCONI E NR Tm 206 ote Lit Cenmgate nv TT ienet rae Ges EE EER 206 31 2 Downloading SSL Certificate to the VSG iss ee EE EE EA SKA ER AA Ee Ke Ee Ad 206 34 9 Devan sal OECD SESSE SIE GO Ee EE OG EE GR GEGEE EG GE Pd 207 31 4 Installing SSL Certificate on a Computer ies sedes ede RE ener 208 Chapter 32 MSA Ne SMT Pee T MM 214 AE e T A ED 214 Table of Contents 16 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 32 1 1 Establishing a Console Port Connection iss ees ss ee AR ee 214 EER Essie TT 215 32 9 The SMT Main Menu SUMMARY sis EER iro ies ee Se Gee 215 324 Navigating die SMT EBFSIGO sei rd EE Rye FDA De ee eds 216 aa A 1 The Navigon Ke usse ER ER ERE adl b cute Pin eei ud amnion 217 34 9 System Re eN ie AR AA iaiia 217 320 d Edere OES eel AA RE EE OE OE AS 218 32 6 1 WAN Type SUS DEE SEEM ER GE EG EG Ge AGE EE 218 Dp WAN
58. My Computer Save as type Test Donne Cancel You can view the backed up file using any text editing program Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts 110 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 111 Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 13 Port Location Mapping This chapter describes the port location mapping feature 13 1 Port Location Mapping Overview With port location mapping you can map a port on the VSG or a VLAN enabled switch to a room number in a building such as a hotel This is done using IEEE802 1q VLAN tags The port location mapping feature is used together with the PMS billing function so charges can be done automatically 13 2 Configuring Port Location Mappings Note Make sure you select Built in Authentication and Scenario A in the Authentication screen see Figure 32 on page 83 and configure the PMS Configuration screen see Figure 39 on page 92 Click System Settings in the navigation panel and the Port Location Mapping link to display the screen as shown Chapter 13 Port Location Mapping 112 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 60 System Setting Port Location Mapping Single Create Backup Restore Backup to Local PC Restore Port Location Mapping List Location Identifier ID Port Identifier ID Description up NE Status C No Charge Charge for use Blocked Add to List Batch Create Location ID From 7 Port ID From sd B
59. Operator login to or logout from the device logout Accounting Syslog Email Syslog Name Description Interval Time Type A log will be sent once after an account is When an account n Account Created 156 created is created A log including subscribers login logouttime When subscriber O Subscriber Trace 3 155 will be sent once after subscriber logout logout z A login users information will be sent fo m D Logged in Users according to specified interval time 60 minutes 166 A log would be sent when user agreement When subscriber m User Agreement 166 enabled login Billing Syslog Email Syslog Name Description Interval Time Type Al ld b t ding t fied O F Billing Log ea n pii SA When log created 166 interval time LAN Devices Management Syslog Email Syslog Name Description Interval Time Type A log including current LAN Devices Status 166 rH D i will be sent according to specified interval B LAN Devices Information ii minutes 164 2 A log will be sent if one of the LAN Devices E F LAN Devices Alarm EE When device fail 161 detected result is F ail Alert Syslog Email Syslog Name Description Interval Time Type When someone Mo A log would be sent when someone failed to failed to access D Administration access Fail access the administration web server the system web 161 server A log would be sent when IP or Port mapping When NAT Pool O O NAT Pool exhausted IP Port 161 exhausted exhausted The fo
60. Profile Login Time Expiration IP Address Current User List Print List MAC Address Disconnect 2006 06 21 09 31 08 2006 06 22 1 Profile 1 09 31 08 10 59 1 2 00 OF FE 32 B4 12 n Disconnect All Disconnect H First 4 Previous Next gt End M Chapter 28 System Status 186 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 System Status Current User List LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click Refresh to update this screen Print List Click Print List to print the current user list to a printer No preview option is available No This field displays the index number Type This field displays the type of subscriber accounts This field displays Static for a static subscriber account This field displays Dynamic for a dynamic subscriber account This field displays Location for a subscriber accessing using port location mapping This field displays Agreement for a subscriber accessing through the agreement Screen This field displays Non Auth for a subscriber accessing without authentication Username This field displays the username of a subscriber account Billing Profile This field displays the number of concurrent access allowed and the name of the billing profile that the subscriber uses Login Time This field displays the time the subscriber logs in Expiration This field displays the time this ac
61. SEER bee Ee ED 176 25 1 2 Session Trace Filename Convention ie ee RR RA Ee ee 177 Chapter 26 so AE EE E 178 ok EO EE AE EA ER 178 26 1 1 Network Management System NMS esee 179 pocas IRA a ED et AE OR RE N 179 Chapter 27 leed el Me EE 182 ERROR dies tecmrader aa a 182 27 2 IGPIIP RS 232 Converter SEP ar EE EE GE anann N GN De Ge GE AG 182 15 Table of Contents VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Chapter 28 ILI p Eo no ICTU 184 28 1 System Status Overvi oe e rta pauta indui He Aaa Ee EE A AM ee E FEAR ADR EE add 184 20 2 System IMOnmatiON M 184 PALOT rd m TT 186 204 DHCP CIEN samssiorriasioriiasaercatisalteradaion aawienioiabieabisendenimennmien 187 20 SUSSIDII Lit asiaa o i bo i der GE EG nla 188 2a 6 MT Baal TERG piede adiu EE ee e pO He ME dd 189 AE IE ie Ed RA N EE EE 189 28 7 1 Accessing the LAN DGVIGB sies gs e p te RR EF rb LER Eoi aa 190 AO BEI LO Re bmi pr oia eR N EE ER EE PAR PEDI 191 288 1 Biling Logs BACKUP usse aspici vb Be DE GER ta GES sab Lei PP rnt ee pk vide 192 OS RIS VESPERE uio ripetere padece deoa d e ld d edad bd pce ed ade 193 26 10 Siate Route TABS etm 193 Chapter 29 Gel pu onec 196 29 1 Configu aion Ove PUN AE etree opc pa D ER 196 29 2 CBIMOGUOSNON BORD an etre rau E utu Eo GE Re ORAE ERIT ES a MEER MIA 196 29 2 1 Configuration Backup Using TETE sesse scisco SA EES orna ru
62. TCP MSS setting 1452 219 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the PPPoE related fields in this menu Table 75 SMT WAN Configuration PPPoE FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN Type D S P T Enter P to enable PPPOE support Username Enter the login user name assigned to you by your ISP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Connect Setting C K Enter C Connect on demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout Setting field This is the default selection Enter K Keep alive when you want your connection up all the time and specify the redial time in the Redial Period field to set how long the VSG waits before trying to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Redial Period Sec The field is only visible when you select K in the Connect Setting field Type the time in seconds that elapses before the VSG automatically attempts to reconnect to the PPPoE server The default is 30 seconds Max Idle Time Min This field is only visible when you select C in the Connect Setting field Type the time in minutes that elapses before the VSG automatically disconnects from the PPPOE server The default is 10 minutes Optional Setting Service Name Enter the name of your Internet service provider PPP MTU Setting
63. TES PPPOE nes eee ede aat ee Ee 219 cp WAN TYDE PPTP ode Ee SE a p t i picta 220 gaT LAN were OE EE EE 222 TE SVO ET EE 223 ON LUNAS aa 224 er ANS ER Upgrade EE EE XH 225 32 9 2 Changing the Administrator Login Password iese ee ee ee ee ee 226 SE IT RESONEER EE De oe dee va Ge ee GE EE OE E idR T 227 RES igi ai 227 ed 2 Factory DOIBINIBS sees cat epee AR up caede Fo BAL BEL DE N bh Ua PAIRE AMI een SE 227 Chapter 33 Een tijgeciigeeebe E 230 33 1 Using the LEDS to Diagnose Problems iii uice ses SEG cott tenerte naa 230 SENE AI dd Ee E 230 258 The LAN Part LEDE e sri SE RR EE ee e rbi IO beta M REN GE ee 230 A2 ka Tie WAN Bon EDS biorra o etel oia t ete m a ta tas 231 Ex NI EP e PON ss PIS 231 EXC Wob eI A 232 cx EO das AR M 232 N Saamen PMET sranane 233 Appendix A Product Specie ALO NS osina 234 Appendix B IP Address Assignment Conflicts LLeeeeeeeeeeeLeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 236 Appendix C siese AA e 240 Appendix D Vendor Specific Attribufes aso ea ciere tke cretus penus eek CH Ene Fer FEY ke RA ea EN ke 242 Appendix E 17 Table of Contents VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Report Printing Using the SP 206 seeks n Ne RENE Ne aab kr Gee de De Eu YA 246 Appendix F Cable Types and Cable Pin Assignments iss ER RR esee 252 Appendix
64. The VSG has one 10 100Mbps Ethernet port The LAN port is auto crossover so you may use a crossover or a straight through Ethernet cable to connect your VSG to a computer external switch If you want to connect more than one Ethernet devices to your VSG you must use an external hub switch Connect a LAN port on the VSG to a port on the switch using an Ethernet cable 2 2 1 2 WAN Port Connect the VSG to a network with broadband Internet service The WAN port is auto crossover so you may use a crossover Ethernet cable or a straight through Ethernet cable to connect your VSG to a router 2 2 1 3 Console Port Local management of the VSG is done through the port labeled CONSOLE It requires a direct connection between the VSG and a computer via a console cable Refer to chapters on SMT configurations for more information You can also connect the CONSOLE port to a statement printer also known as account generator printer sold separately with a DB25 male to DB9 male adapter A statement printer allows you to create and print out subscriber accounts automatically In addition you can also print the system status and the account and network reports Set the function of the console port in the web configurator see Section 5 1 on page 56 2 2 1 4 PMS Port Use a DB9 console cable to connect the PMS port to a PMS system 2 2 1 5 Reset Button Use a pointed object to press this button in once to reset the VSG back to the factory defaults
65. V2 User s Guide Appendix E Report Printing Using the SP 200 This appendix shows you how to print reports using the SP 200 Overview The SP 200 allows you to print status reports about the subscriber accounts and general VSG system information Simply press a key combination on the SP 200 to print a report instantly without accessing the web configurator The following lists the reports that you can print using the SP 200 Daily account summary Monthly account summary System status Network statistics Initial Setup Do the following before you start report printing using an SP 200 1 Purchase an SP 200 from your local dealer if you don t have one 2 Set the function of the console port on the VSG for statement printer connection see Section 5 1 General System Setting on page 56 3 Connect the SP 200 to the CONSOLE port on the VSG see Section 2 2 Hardware Connections on page 39 4 Turn on the power to the SP 200 Refer to the user s guide that comes with your SP 200 for more information Key Combination The following table lists the key combination to print each report Refer to Figure 54 on page 106 for button labels on the SP 200 Note You must press the key combination on the SP 200 within five seconds to print Appendix E Report Printing Using the SP 200 246 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 92 SP 200 Report Printing Key Combination REPORT TYPE KEY COMBINAT
66. VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Note The user name and password are case sensitive Figure 9 Web Configurator Login Firmware version Username Password Get Started b b 5 You should see the main screen as shown Figure 10 Web Configurator Main Menu Zy XE L VSG 1200 v2 Vantage Service Gateway Ii Configuration Menu amp Configuration Menu System Host Name all AE System Setting Domain Name Advanced Setting Hig System Status Location Name Max 50 HG System Tools Address Max 200 City Max 50 State Province CC Max 50 Zip Postal Code ha Max 10 Country EE Max 50 Contact Name Lx Max 50 Contact Telephone i LLL Max 50 Contact FAX lt Max 50 Contact Email eN IE N Max 50 Date 2006 z 6 vj 14 Z vear Month Day Location Information 015 ZyXEL Communications Corporation All Rights Reserved Note If there is no activity for longer than five minutes after you log in the VSG will automatically log you out If this happens simply log back in again You can change the timeout period in the web configurator refer to Chapter 7 on page 70 3 3 Navigation Panel The VSG web configurator provides two levels of navigation the Configuration Menu panel and a screen specific link panel 43 Chapter 3 The Web Configurator VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 3 3 1 The Navigation Panel The navigation panel on the left of a
67. an online credit card billing service provider set the payment account information in the Credit Card screen If you are not using one of the credit card billing services supported on the VSG then you cannot use credit card for billing Click Advanced Setting Credit Card to displays the screen as shown below Enter your payment account in this screen Figure 61 Advanced Setting Credit Card Authorize net Version Merchant ID Merchant Password Payment Gateway Email Additional Information C iValidate Merchant ID Terminal ID C World Pay Payment Gateway Installation ID Currency Code Description Test Mode Merchant Transaction Key Secure Server Address Credit Card 24 Need Password https secure authorize net gateway transact dll Merchant Name ma Username and Password Usage Time https silverado trivalley co mimerchant processcc asp https selectworldpay com wcc purchase Success Credit Card icons to be displayed on the login page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Setting Credit Card LABEL DESCRIPTION Authorize net Select this option if you have a payment account from Authorize net Version This is the read only software version of the Authorize Net payment gateway Merchant ID Enter the ID number that you received from Authorize Net 117 Chapter 14 Credit
68. as the company web site as your welcome screen In addition you can externally design a web page with images and or advanced multimedia features Figure 68 Customization Login Screen Frame Drame Top Frame URL Bottom Frame This frame will show the standard login page Chapter 15 Customization 124 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the related fields Table 34 Customization Login Screen Frame LABEL DESCRIPTION Frame Select this option to configure and set the VSG to display the subscriber login screen in two frames Top Frame Enter a web site address in the URL field for example http www zyxel com Bottom Frame The bottom frame of the subscriber login screen displays the default login prompt You cannot configure this part of the screen The following figure shows a framed subscriber login screen example Figure 69 Subscriber Login Screen Example Frame ZA https 1 1 1 1 http 192 168 1 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help Heak 9 OA A search Graves Citer Ehr S mi 8 unis ew Gsnactt ir ZyX E L Global Corporate Hews Product Support Where to Buy Contact Us Select a product m Search LU u c Ta New Product What s New Award amp Review Solution Center October 20 2004 P 334 wins 2004 z EFF E ZyWALLS 5 ZyXEL Announces ZyWALL Remote Security Rasta SO
69. billing service providers allowing you to use a credit card service to authorize process and manage credit card transactions directly through the Internet SSL Secure Login With Secure Socket Layer SSL security activated upon login data exchanged between the VSG and client computers is encrypted and protected Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG 32 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide PPPOE Support RFC2516 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPOE driver on the VSG is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers PPTP Support Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using a TCP IP based network PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet Subscribers can use PPTP to connect to a broadband modem to achieve access to high speed data networks via a familiar dialup networking user interface Reset Button Use the reset button to restore the VSG back to its factory defaults Plug and Play Internet Access The VSG provides Internet access to attached com
70. check box to disable this feature Your access network is not available for roaming subscribers Login Mode Specify a login method for roaming subscribers Select Replay Directly to display the VSG s default login screen Select Proxy Reply with Redirect Login Page URL to redirect roaming subscribers to the same login screen as specified in the Login Page Screen see Section 15 2 on page 120 for more information Select Proxy Reply with Redirect Login Page URL and enter the URL of the login page for roaming subscribers only Apply Click Apply to save the changes 9 2 1 Scenario Options Note This feature is for built in authentication method only When you select Built in Authentication in the Authentication screen you must select a pre configured scenario option by clicking the Select option link to display a screen as shown next Select a scenario option in the Items Check field and click Apply to save the settings Then proceed to configure the billing and accounting settings 85 Chapter 9 Authentication VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 33 System Authentication Scenario Guide Scenario Guide Items check PMS billing system Infrastructure Need username password when guests go to Internet Need to create static accounts Allow guests to select service when first login Billing mode BillingCharge mode Default Billing Profile Remarks Express way to f
71. einen netten 270 Table 104 Two Subnets EXSmple ia EE ER Re be EK Se REN So bx be Ge ek cui De ge 271 yu xw Et om 271 y muro s cL a EE a eld eta a EG Eg Ee ee es 272 Tane PROF oe MR OE HO EE EK EE Ure pedi c DR 272 Table i EE o pu EE AR EE RE EE 273 Qu WOR MESI p Mr OE ER N ER ONE 273 IE TIS ed DETUR Utm 273 Table t1 Si os c OE OR 274 Table 112 Class C Subnet PEINS bade Da Ee AG ee ES uan 274 Table Tis Class B Subnet PERE ss ES DE ee ER GE DE ee m 275 List of Tables 28 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 29 List of Tables VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the VSG 1200 V2 Vantage Service Gateway Note Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your VSG 1200 V2 for its various applications The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by web configurator The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by web configurator Note Use the web configurator or System Management Terminal SMT to configure your VSG 1200 V2 Not all features can be configured through all interfaces Related Documentation e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXE
72. example you Message 1 3 may enter a refund policy Additional Remark Enter any additional information For example enter contact information for help The following figure shows an example of a standard subscriber login screen with the service selection messages Figure 71 Subscriber Login Screen Example Service Selection Messages Welcome Username Password Please choose from the following service selection 1 day 10 00 x How many units of Internet access would you like to purchase 1 7 Please kindly note that there will be no refund once connectivity is confirmed Please note that the time block of selected service is based on continuous usage Please click ENTER to confirm your acceptance of the usage charge or CANCEL to exit The selected service charge will be posted directly into your guest folio Enter Cancel Chapter 15 Customization 126 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 15 3 Information Window You can set the VSG to display an information window after a subscriber has successfully logged in This information window shows the amount of time a subscriber has used or the time the subscriber still has to access the Internet The subscriber information window varies depending on the billing and accounting configuration you set on the VSG The information window displays the amount of time used for Internet access when you select Built in Authentication in the Authentication Config
73. field displays the index number Address List This read only field displays the address pool Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry ies Apply Click Apply to save the changes 79 Chapter 8 NAT Pool VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Authentication This chapter shows you how to set up subscriber authentication on the VSG 9 1 Authentication Overview You can set the VSG to authenticate subscriber in a number of ways User agreement CAS Central Authentication Service Built in authentication Remote RADIUS server By default subscriber authentication is disabled This allows all subscribers to access the Internet without entering account username and password 9 1 1 User Agreement In cases where authentication is not required and anyone can access the Internet through the VSG you can set the VSG to redirect client users to an Internet service usage agreement page Users must accept the service usage agreement before they can access the Internet 9 1 2 CAS Central Authentication Service The Hilton Group Corporation developed the High Speed Internet Access HSIA service to provide Internet access service across its entire Hilton Group hotels In order to use the HSIA hotel guest s must be authenticated through the proprietary CAS in the local hotel network or the remote network The CAS performs both user authentication and accounting Figure 30 CAS
74. incoming reply packets can have their original values restored 8 1 4 VPN and NAT A VPN Virtual Private Network provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site to site lines A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling encryption authentication access control and auditing technologies services used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses the TCP IP protocol suite for communication The VSG allows subscribers to create a VPN tunnel to a remote site Note For IPSec the VSG does not support AH protocol By default the VSG performs NAT on the LAN mapping multiple private LAN addresses to a single public address on the WAN This prevents subscribers from creating multiple VPN connections to a remote VPN device that allows only one VPN connection per source IP address 75 Chapter 8 NAT Pool VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide In order to allow subscribers to establish multiple VPN connections to a remote VPN device with single connection per source limitation set the VSG to perform NAT on the WAN You need to configure NAT address pool for use with VPN connections on the WAN port The VSG automatically maps one more private IP addresses to one more public IP addresses for VPN packets The following table describes the NAT mapping types on the WAN for VPN packets Table 12 WAN NAT Mapping Types for VPN TYPE DESCRIPTION One to One For VPN connections to the sam
75. keep alive 220 Redial Period 220 PPTP 33 220 connect on demand 221 connection ID 221 idle timeout 221 keep alive 221 Redial Period 221 print dynamic subscriber account 108 print reports 246 printout preview 106 problems 230 product certifications 235 product registration 7 product specifications 234 279 Index VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide environmental 235 general 234 management 235 performance 235 physical 235 Property Management System See PMS R rack mounting installation 38 rack mounting kit 38 RADIUS 84 accounting methods 81 secret key 84 RADIUS authentication information window 127 RADIUS server 242 rear panel 41 redirect subscriber login screen 122 registration product 7 related document 30 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service See RADIUS report printing on SP 200 246 daily account summary 247 initial setup 246 key combination 246 monthly account summary 247 network statistics 250 System status 248 reset 227 231 reset button 33 40 reset to the factory defaults 40 47 restart the VSG 227 restore configuration file 199 RFC 1631 34 74 RFC2516 33 RJ 45 252 S safety warnings 5 scenario option 85 scheduled firmware upgrade 204 Secure Socket Layer 206 See SSL security 234 serial console port 253 server port 160 server port number 232 service selection messages 125 session information 188 client computer 188 total entries 188 update interval 188 sessio
76. name of the VSG for identification purposes Domain Name This field displays the domain name 223 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 78 SMT System Status continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Console Port This field displays the console port speed Speed Web Server Port This field displays the port number for the embedded web server If the port number is not 80 then you need to append the port number to the WAN port IP address to access the VSG web configurator For example if 8010 is the web server port number then you must enter http www 192 168 1 1 8010 in the address bar on the web browser where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN or LAN port IP address E mail Server IP This field displays the IP address of the e mail server to which the VSG forwards Address the e mail when the subscriber s e mail server s is behind a NAT enabled network or firewall WAN Configuration WAN Type D S This field displays the WAN IP address assignment method Static IP Setting or P T DHCP Client IP Address This field displays the WAN IP address of the VSG Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask on the WAN port Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway Primary DNS This field displays the IP address of the primary DNS server Server Secondary DNS This field displays the IP address of the secondary DNS server Server DHCP Confi
77. open the System Preferences window Figure 202 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu 8 Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location 2 Click Network in the icon bar e Select Automatic from the Location list e Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list e Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list 265 Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 203 Macintosh OS X Network eo Network i ER m oO g Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic m Show Built in Ethernet B PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP A Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your VSG 1200 V2 in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your VSG 1200 V2 and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Setting
78. press the reset button on the front panel to reset the VSG All your custom configuration will be lost 231 Chapter 33 Troubleshooting VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 33 3 Web Configurator I cannot access the web configurator Table 83 Troubleshooting Web Configurator STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure you are using the correct WAN or LAN IP address 2 Make sure you entered the correct username and password The default administrator username is admin and the default password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive If you change the server port number you need to append the port number to the WAN or LAN port IP address to access the web configurator For example if you enter 8010 as the web server port number then you must enter http Awww 192 168 1 1 8010 where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN or LAN port IP address If you have forgotten the administrator user name and or password you must reset the VSG back to the factory defaults using the reset button Use a pointed object to press the reset button on the front panel to reset the VSG All your custom configuration will be lost Ping the VSG from your computer on the WAN or LAN The web configurator does not display properly Table 84 Troubleshooting Internet Browser Display STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure you are using Internet Explorer version 4 0 and later or Netscape versi
79. printer also known as an account generator printer Make sure the CONSOLE port is set to the correct mode Refer to Chapter 3 on page 42 on system settings using the web configurator Use the SMT to set general system settings configure the LAN and WAN settings change the administrator login password upgrade firmware or reset the device to the factory defaults For advanced configuration use the web configurator Refer to the corresponding web configurator chapters for background information 32 1 1 Establishing a Console Port Connection After the VSG is directly connected to a computer using the console port turn on the computer and run a terminal emulation program for example Hyper Terminal in Windows and configure its communication parameters as follows 9600 bits per second Parity none 8 data bits 1 stop bit Flow control none Chapter 32 Using The SMT 214 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 162 HyperTerminal Communication Parameter Settings Example Port Settings Bits per second Data bits H Parity None x Stop bits hoo H Elow control Me zl Restore Defaults 32 2 SMT Login Screen Press ENTER to display the login screen For your first login enter the default administrator user name admin and default password 1234 and then press ENTER Note The user name and password are case sensitive Figure 163 SMT Login Screen Inte
80. select D in the WAN Mode field Enter the subnet mask depending on your network needs The default is 255 255 255 0 Refer to Appendix H on page 268 if you are implementing subnetting Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default gateway Primary Enter the IP address of the DNS server s in the Primary DNS IP Address and or Secondary DNS IP Secondary DNS IP Address fields Address The default primary DNS server IP address is 168 95 1 1 You must specify a DNS server if you set the VSG to use a static WAN IP address At the S ave and return R eturn without saving M odify prompt type S and press ENTER to save the changes and return to the previous screen type R and press ENTER to discard all changes and return to the previous screen or type M and press ENTER to continue configuring the fields Restart the device when prompted Press ESC and enter Y to stop any actions in the current screen and return to the previous screen All changes will be discarded 32 6 2 WAN Type PPPoE To activate PPPoE support on the VSG enter P in the WAN Type field to display the WAN Configuration screen as shown next Refer to the related web configurator section for background information Figure 167 SMT WAN Configuration PPPoE WAN Configuration WAN Type D S P T DP Username Password Connect Setting C K s Max idle Time Min 10 Optional Setting Service name PPP MTU Setting 1492
81. set the VSG to assign private IP addresses to the subscribers connected on the LAN Select Public Service to set the VSG to assign public IP addresses to the subscribers connected on the LAN You must have more than one public IP address from your ISP Configure private and public DHCP IP address assignment in the Server screen Refer to Section 7 1 1 on page 70 for more information Reset Click Reset to restart configuring this screen again Apply Click Apply to save the changes 10 2 PMS Property Management System Many hotels use a PMS device to perform in room billing for services such as room services mini bar pay per view TV or telephone that the guests use With PMS the VSG allows subscribers to purchase additional time units online In addition subscribers can select from a number of different billing plans To use PMS for billing first connect the VSG to a PMS device using the PMS port refer to Chapter 2 on page 38 then configure the PMS settings on the VSG 10 2 1 Port Location Mapping When you activate port location mapping and PMS on the VSG two charge modes are available per room and per subscriber Select Based on Room when location is important If a subscriber disconnects from one location and reconnects in another location the VSG prompts for the user name and password again Select Based on Subscriber to allow a subscriber to freely move between different locations without promp
82. subscriber account information to your computer 1 In the Create Static Subscriber Account screen and scroll down to the Static Accounts backup and restore section 2 Click Backup Figure 45 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore Static Accounts backup and restore Backup Click to save the account information to your computer To restore a previously saved account information file to your system select this option locate the account information file and click Apply File Path Browse Restore 3 A File Download window displays Click Save Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts 98 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 46 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore File Download File Download h xi op Y Some files can harm your computer If the file information below E looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file File name sta list t t File type Test Document From 10531 1 would you like to open the file or save it to your computer m Cancel Moreino Iv Always ask before opening this type of file 4 A Save As window displays Specify the filename and or location and click Save to save the backup file Figure 47 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore Save As Save As E si Save in t Desktop e i eX Ed My Computer My Network Places Shortcut to Cindy Bkup Drive E History Desktop NUS My C
83. subscriber account username This field is empty if you disable authentication in the Authentication screen see Chapter 9 on page 80 for more information Date This is the date and time the VSG creates a session trace record VLANId This is the VID of the VLAN to which a subscriber belongs This field is empty if no VLAN tag is present see Chapter 13 on page 112 for more information SourcelP This is the IP address of the subscriber SourceMac This is the MAC address of the subscriber s computer SourcePort This is the source port number of the subscriber DestIP This is the destination IP address the subscriber accesses DestPort This is the destination port number for this session 177 Chapter 25 Session Trace VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 26 SNMP This chapter shows you how to set up SNMP on the VSG in order to use a third party management software to remotely manage the VSG 26 1 SNMP Overview Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your VSG supports SNMP version one and version 2 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation Figure 118 SNMP Management Model MANAGER SNMP AGENT AGENT AGENT L amp i Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network
84. the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 11 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host Chapter 8 NAT Pool 74 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 8 1 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back
85. the factory defaults You can back up and restore the configuration file either through the web configurator or using an external TFTP server Note Do NOT interrupt the file transfer process as this may permanently damage your device 29 2 Configuration Backup Backup is highly recommended once your VSG is functioning properly 1 Click System Tools and Configuration A screen displays as shown next Chapter 29 Configuration 196 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 134 Configuration Backup Configuration This feature can import your saved settings to this device or export the stored settings from this device to your PC Backup Click Backup to save current system configuration from this device to your computer or to the remote TFTP server TFTP Server IP Address l Text File Name Apply Restore To restore your stored system configuration to this device File Path Browse Apply TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Apply Reset the system back to factory defaults Keep subscriber profile Keep port location mapping profile Apply 2 Click Backup A File Download window displays as shown next Figure 135 Configuration Backup File Download File Download E xj You have chosen to download a file from this location export cfg from 10 59 1 1 What would you like to do with this file C Open this file from its current location Save this file to disk KV
86. the links for accessing the static account configuration screens when you click System Settings Accounting and Static Accounts Figure 40 Static Account Links Static Account Dynamic Account _Static Account Setting Create Static Account Static Account Operator Static Account List 11 2 Global Static Account Settings To configure global static account settings click the Static Account Setting link to display the Screen as shown Figure 41 Static Account Settings Global Settings Static Account Setting Static Account Setting Iv Allow concurrent access with one account Concurrent Access Max concurrent access Y Customize Printout Customize printout text Statement Printer Q Print to C PC Connected Printer Q Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts 94 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Static Account Settings Global Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Concurrent Access Select Allow concurrent access with one account to allow more than one users to access the Internet using the same account at the same time Then specify the number of concurrent users from the Max concurrent access drop down list box The default number of concurrent access is 2 users per account Customize Printout Click Customize printout text to set the account printout page Refer to Account Printout on page 129 Print To
87. use Otherwise it displays Not In Use Delete Click Delete All to remove all accounts Click Delete to remove the selected account Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page 12 4 1 Backing Up the Dynamic Account List Follow the steps below to backup the dynamic account list to your computer 1 Display the Dynamic Account Setting screen refer to Figure 53 on page 105 2 Click Dynamic Account List refer to Figure 57 on page 108 3 Click the Backup link 4 A File Download window displays Click Save Figure 58 Dynamic Account List Backup File Download x 9 Some files can harm pour computer If the file information below looks suspicious o you do not fully trust the source do rot open or save this He File name dyn liet at File type Test Document From 10 59 1 1 Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer om E V Always ask before opaning thie lype of fie Cancel Mere Irfo 5 A Save As window displays Specify the filename and or location and click Save 109 Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 59 Dynamic Account List Backup Save As Save in Dek eri Ee Desktop ues
88. zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland info zyxel fr 33 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH GERMANY Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany support zyxel hu 36 1 3361649 www zyxel hu ZyXEL Hungary HUNGARY 48 Zoldlomb Str info zyxel hu 36 1 3259100 H 1025 Budapest Hungary http zyxel kz support 7 3272 590 698 www zyxel kz ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk ave Office 414 KAZAKHSTAN sales zyxel kz 7 3272 590 689 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com T ed Customer Support VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL Communications A S NORWAY Nils Hansens vei 13 sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway info pl zyxel com 48 22 333 8250 www pl zyxel com ZyXEL Communications POLAND ul Okrzei 1A 48 22 333 8251 03 715 Warszawa Poland http zyxel ru support 7 095 542 89 29 www zyxel ru ZyXEL Russia RUSSIA Ostrovityanova 37a Str s
89. 0 Data bits 8 Parity Mone Stop bits 1 Any C Specify Au M jJ ess 2 n LL HA ee a 2 FR 1 C Enable Disable Enable C Disable Default C Custom Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 4 System Setting System LABEL DESCRIPTION System Host Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters for identification purposes Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the VSG may obtain a domain name from a DHCP server The domain name entered by you is given priority over the DHCP server assigned domain name Location Information Specify where the VSG is located and the person or administrator you can contact in case you have problem using the VSG Location Name Enter a descriptive name of the location for identification purposes Address Enter the street address of the location where the VSG is installed 57 Chapter 5 System VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 4 System Setting System continued LABEL DESCRIPTION City Enter the name of the city where the VSG is installed State Province Enter the name of the state or province where the VSG is installed Zip Postal Enter the ZIP or postal code of the location where is the VSG is installed Code Country Enter the name of the country where the VSG is installed Contact Name Enter the n
90. 0V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution Ifthe power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly Safety Warnings 5 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Safety Warnings 6 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a n
91. 11111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 109 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER SA UE EIE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 110 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 273 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting P 660HW T v2 User s Guide The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 111 Eight Subnets BROADCAST SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8
92. 189 System Status LAN Device Status iss sesse se dd Re ee ek Re dd dd ee Re ede AE ee de 190 Sema AS PING LOJ re 191 System Status Static Route Table caeci ree rte GEE aeri eta crei ect 194 Firmware Scheduled Upgrade ee ek AE Se EA As AE ee AA RE Ee RA ati tna 205 ELE y e md 207 EE NI 216 SMT Control Key EGSOITEHICHDS ORE EE ee eua FER QUK Oe CIL FEBRE tira EU 217 SME System CODIGUFHOIT sesse sesse eb rrr circiter rea eb rii v erben 217 SMT WAN Configuration Static or Dynamic IP Address sssss 219 SMT WAN Cantigarebion PPPOE sisie De Ese i bere GE Ge Ee E pue EE Ge 220 SMT WAN Configuration PP UP sesse sees iese tetro ek obser rra etre erede E EER 221 SNIE LAN COngUr AHON SR TT 222 EE o E meri a T 223 Troubleshooting the Power LED ase osse es ee de ga DL E 230 Troubleshooting the LAN LED iseer Ek tret eta rn nad enda De eek ee d 230 Troubleshooting the WAN WED sans rettet poetae EED EERS GE DE DS GEREG EE pL GEGEE EE ERG 231 27 List of Tables VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 82 Troubleshooting Console FOR sies pR PELIS ad SG ose i bona cz ED dax 231 Table 83 Troubleshooting Web Configurator sesse Ee KAR EE ER KA EE Re AG Ke Ek ke ee EE ek 232 Table 84 Troubleshooting Internet Browser Display iese ee ee ee 232 Table 85 Troubleshooting Internet Access se Ee ee Ee EE ee EE nan Re ee ee ee ee 232 Table 86 Troubleshooting the Statement Printe
93. 200 V2 User s Guide Figure 121 Advanced Setup Miscellanea Miscellanea TCP IP RS 232 Converter Disable This function enables administrator to extend the distance between SP and Device with a TCP IP RS 232 Converter Socket Port o 001 1005 Statement Printer Device SP 200 7 el Bi EI 3 EET EE s IE Converter IP Address B EI Ail gll sd S TES f The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Miscellanea LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP RS 232 Select Enable to activate this feature Convertor Select Disable to deactivate this feature Socket Port Enter the number of the service port for the IP serial conversion service Statement Printer Select the model name of your statement printer Device Convertor IP Specify the IP address of the converter Enter the IP address in dotted decimal Address notation For example 10 59 1 100 Apply Click Apply to save the changes 183 Chapter 27 Miscellanea VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 28 System Status This chapter describes the screens under System Status 28 1 System Status Overview Use the System Status screen to view current device status such as the WAN LAN settings current online user list session lists etc 28 2 System Information Click System Status and System to display the screen as shown next The System screen automatically updates every 5 seconds Figure
94. 224 225 254 255 The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 112 Class C Subnet Planning NO BORROWED HOST NO HOSTS PER BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 255 255 255 128 25 255 255 255 192 26 62 255 255 255 224 27 30 126 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 NI OO oO BR oO rm Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets see Table 100 on page 269 available for subnetting Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting 274 P 660HW T v2 Users Guide The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 113 Class B Subnet Planning ME een HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS EE PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 2
95. 40 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 275 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide A AAA 234 access control 34 access point AP 36 accessing a LAN device 190 methods 190 requirements 190 account billing account expiration 103 account printout 95 129 customize 129 examples 130 preview 130 account printout preview 101 accounting 34 Accumulation 81 Time to Finish 81 accounting port 84 Accumulation 81 84 advanced subscriber login screen 123 advertisement link 149 243 frequency 149 sequence 149 alternative subnet mask notation 270 assign IP address to a computer 256 authentication 34 80 Built in Authentication 81 CAS 80 RADIUS 81 types 80 User Agreement 80 authentication port 84 authentication setup 82 automate firmware upgrade 204 automatic firmware upgrade process 204 B backing up billing logs 192 bandwidth control 144 bandwidth limit downlink 90 uplink 90 Index Bandwidth Management 90 144 activate 144 class based 144 equal share 144 RADIUS 146 types 144 bandwidth management 243 billing 88 234 account credit card 32 billing logs 191 backup 192 charge type 191 delete all 191 export 191 opening 192 sample 193 billing profile 88 bandwidth limit 90 create 88 currency 89 duration 90 edit 89 setting 89 built in authentication 34 84 information
96. 5 SMTP VSA Error SMTP Redirect no Server setup No e mail server configuration is set on the VSG while the VSA response from the external RADIUS server indicates SMTP redirection is activated with an attribute value of 1 VSA dis Error BW up down Bandwidth Management able Bandwidth management is not activated on the VSG while the VSA response from the external RADIUS server contains upload and download bandwidth limits VSA Error BW up down Equal Bandwidth management is activated on the VSG with equal down bandwidth for all bandwidth applied to all subscribers subscriber selected VSA Error BW up down Class Bandwidth management is activated on the VSG with class of service is selected but of service selected while no upload download bandwidth no BW up down information is obtained from the external RADIUS server VSA Error BW up down No The external RADIUS server does not send the BW down BW down attribute value to the VSG VSA Error BW up down No The external RADIUS server does not send the BW up BW up attribute value to the VSG VSA Error BW up down BW up The value for BW up attribute is invalid out of range VSA Error BW up down BW The value for BW down attribute is invalid out of range Appendix D Vendor Specific Attributes 244 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 245 Appendix D Vendor Specific Attributes VSG 1200
97. A server port defines a server to which all specified requests are forwarded In addition centralized LAN device management is possible through the VSG using port mapping You can access the management interface on the LAN device remotely provided that the LAN device has allowed remote management 21 2 Configuring LAN Device Port Mapping Click Advanced and LAN Devices to display the LAN Device Management screen as shown Chapter 21 LAN Devices 160 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Note You can configure port mapping for up to 300 LAN devices on the VSG Figure 105 LAN Devices 2 49 50 LAN Devices Accommodate up to 300 entries Polling Interval i Min s No Device Name Virtual Port Device Device Device Application 60001 60300 IP Address Server Port MAC Address 1 Ed EI EED IE Tor s Notice The system does not support FTP Delete All HIGO 1 7 Page M First 4 Previous Next gt End MI I JR JL jb L Reemi I b JL II 1 L N rer 1 b Sd Dd fh OIE I ml The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 LAN Devices LABEL DESCRIPTION Polling Interval Specify the time interval in minutes between the VSG s probes for device availability No This read only field displays the index number of an entry Device Name Enter the name of the LAN device for identification purposes Virtual Port Enter a unique port number between 60001 and 60300 to m
98. AC address filter Session limit Billing Flexible time based billing Port Location Mapping Credit cards via Authorize net iValidate and WorldPay Appendix A Product Specifications 234 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 87 Product Specifications General continued PMS Billing Supports Micros Fidelio Spectrum MK II Marriott and Proprietary PMS transaction logs Supports IEEE802 1q tag based VLAN infrastructure Local Services Walled garden Advertisement URL link Login page re direction Customizable subscriber login page and login messages MAC IP URL passthrough Table 88 Product Specifications Performance and Management Maximum Throughput 72 Mbps Concurrent Users 1 024 Management Web based management TFTP HTTP firmware upgrade Schedules firmware upgrade Backup Restore configuration Real time status list Remote authorized management Configuration file import export LAN device management Syslog Session trace SNMP v1 v2 MIB II with traps Table 89 Product Specifications Physical and Environmental LED Power SYS WAN LAN 10 100 Dimension 440 W x 116 L x 44 H mm Temperature 0 C to 50 C Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing Power Internal universal switching power supply 100 220 V AC 50 60 Hz Maximum power consumption 10W Certifications FCC part 15 Class A CE CSA RoHS VCCI WEEE 235 Appendix A Pr
99. Account LISE asses REG Ge KG e EE te cinco N Ca Eia 103 Table 27 Accounting Dynamic Account Setting i s EE nennt nennen Ge 105 Table 29 Dame Actou EISE see EE Da d op tado e te La dac ED ARRA 108 Table 29 System Setting Port Location Mapping iis tetro ER SEE EEN ee GEEN Gen GE Ee aga 113 Table 30 Advanced Setting Credit Card ses EER EE SEEKS EER SEE ESS EER DE SERE EE EE GEGEE EE audae p DR Ge 117 Table 31 Customization Login Standard iuueni ria keen keiten ati da 122 Table 32 Customization Login Screen Redirect SEKER EERS EER EER ERG Veo ku PRU RE EE Re Se Si 123 Table 33 Customization Login Screen Advanced iese ee Ee RE Re AA ee AE Ee ee 123 Table 34 Customization Login Screen Frame esse seke EE Re KA GE EE Re Ke Ke ek ee ke kk 125 Table 35 Customization Service Selection Customization ee ee 126 Table 36 Customization Information Window iese ese ee Re Ee EA AA Ee AA Ee ee 128 Table 37 Customization Account Printout ELT 129 Table 38 Customization Account Printout sussies EN EER GEEN Ge SE Ek Gees ER EN ee EE EE 134 List of Tables 26 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 T
100. Address Translated IP Address VPN Type NAT Pool Table OE 90 80 90 EE 12 211 21 185 240 PPTP OE 90 80 90 EE 13 211 21 185 241 PPTP OE 90 80 90 EE 14 211 21 185 242 PPTP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 System Status NAT Tool Table LABEL DESCRIPTION No This field displays the index number of an entry Source IP Address This field displays the IP address of the subscriber device on the LAN that is using the VPN Source MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the subscriber device on the LAN that is using the VPN Translated IP Address This field displays the WAN IP address of the VSG to which the LAN IP address of the subscriber using the VPN was translated VPN Type This field displays the type of VPN connection that is being used IPSec or PPTP 28 7 LAN Device Status The LAN Devices Status screen displays the status of LAN devices configured in the LAN Devices screen refer to Chapter 21 on page 160 189 Chapter 28 System Status VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Click System Status and LAN Devices Status to display the screen as shown next This screen automatically updates every minute Figure 127 System Status LAN Device Status LAN Devices Status We detect below listed devices to check if alive every 1 min You can manage below listed devices by clicking device name to access its Web based Ul
101. BLISHED SYST 02D 02H 42M 46S HOST VSG 1200 FRMW 1 05 BTRM 1 01 WAMA 00 90 0E 00 4A 29 LAMA 00 90 0E 00 4A 28 WATP DHCP WAIP 172 21 2 67 WASM 255 255 0 0 WAGW 172 21 0 254 PDNS 172 20 0 63 SDNS 172 20 0 27 DHCP DHCP SERVER DHSP 10 59 1 2 DHEP 10 59 1 254 DHLT 1440 EMAIL PORT25 2004 10 28 11 24 42 End The following table describes the labels in this report Table 93 SP 200 System Status LABEL DESCRIPTION WAST This field displays the WAN connection status SYST This field displays the time since the system was last restarted HOST This field displays the description name of the VSG for identification purposes FRMW This field displays the version of the firmware on the VSG BTRM This field displays the version of the bootrom WAMA This field displays the MAC address of the VSG on the WAN LAMA This field displays the MAC address of the VSG on the LAN WATP This field displays the mode of the WAN port WAIP This field displays the IP address of the WAN port on the VSG WASM This field displays the subnet mask of the WAN port on the VSG WAGW This field displays the IP address of the default gateway of the WAN port on the VSG PDNS This field displays the IP address of the primary DNS server SDNS This field displays the IP address of the secondary DNS server 249 Appendix E Report Printing Usin
102. Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 37 Customization Account Printout continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Enter the label name for the field displaying the account password Usage Time Enter the label name for the field displaying the amount of time an account is allowed for Internet access Billing Method Enter the label name for the field displaying the method for billing Billing Profile Enter the label name for the field displaying the name for the billing profile used Description Purchase Unit Enter the label name for the field displaying the number of time units purchased Additional Label 1 2 Select this check box to display the specified label name s for the field s displaying any additional information For example you can specify additional information such as ESS ID and or WEB key for wireless stations when you connect an access point to the VSG Price Select this check box to display the specified label name for the field displaying the total price Account Create Time Select this check box to display the time an account is created Select a time format from the drop down list boxes Expire Description Enter a short description that tells the subscribers when they should activate their accounts before the displayed time Date Time Select a date and time format for the expiry date Accumulation Enter a short description that te
103. DE DES 188 List of Figures 22 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 System sigtus MISSION LIEE sisie EE SR be RS EERS LEER RUE MEE dd 188 System Status NAT Pool Table iios eiie Elk EN RES Ro ELA eb ub ttai kt 189 System Status LAN Device Stas iss iita rari EER GAN ke pL Ge Ge BOER 190 System situs Biling Log ui idee e o oa eps DER Una KU LEG ee Rg eg 191 Billing Log Backup File Download sed vote c he ee Ge vade ee 192 Billing Log Backup Save T Y 192 Billing Log Backup Example File Content iii ees de ee ee ee ee ee ee de 193 System Status PMS Transaction od suiit epo rr AG EERS GEE ES GEREG IIR 193 System Status Statie Route Table ss DEER SEK GENRE hn GER WE Ge Ge SEN 193 A GENE Backup T ET 197 Configuration Backup File Download siste ss GREG GEE EER DERE ESEG EERS GEWEER DEE 197 Coniguration Backup Sava AB sissies ESE FR GERS iini h KERS Ek EERS N Dee Ke 198 Configuration Backup using IE TE GEGEE uid ENG GREG Be DS Es SEE EE
104. DESCRIPTION Static Route Set the fields below to configure static route settings You can configure up to 20 static routes at a time No This is the index number of the static route that you chose in menu 12 1 Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Destination Type the subnet mask for this destination Subnet Mask Gateway IP Type the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same Address network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Hop Count Hop count represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Select a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Interface Specify whether the static route setting applies to the LAN or the WAN interface Apply Click Apply to save the changes New static route entries display in the table below Static Route Table This table displays the static routes configured No Th
105. Device Management screen The LAN device status is OK in the LAN Device Status screen There are two methods to access the LAN device directly or through the web configurator To access the LAN device through the web configurator open the LAN Device Status screen and click the device name A new Internet browser should display showing the login screen of the LAN device management interface Chapter 28 System Status 190 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide To directly access the LAN device enter the WAN IP address of your VSG and the virtual port number of the LAN device separated by a colon For example enter http 192 168 1 1 60001 where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN IP address of the VSG The login screen of the LAN device management interface should display 28 8 Billing Log Click System Status and Billing Log in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Refer to Section 28 8 1 on page 192 for information on backing up the billing logs to a computer Figure 128 System Status Billing Log Billing Log refresh Export to Txt File No Username Location Billing Profile Log Time Usage Time Bill Service Type Charge from Status 1 2222zzrr Profile 1 Eos 1 day s 10 00 Private Dynamic In Use 2006 06 21 2 222222tt Profile 1 09 43 07 1 day s 10 00 Private Dynamic Expired 2006 06 21 3 2222zzm Profile 1 09 42 29 1 day s 10 00 Private Dynamic Finished 1 4 Cindy Profile 1 py 1 day s 10 00 Private Static Finished MGO 1
106. ER IRE Ep E ERE PER t 211 Root CSU SUE EE MU Ge AA Ee EKEN ee eN 211 Rad vi limpor Wizard EE 211 wen AE EA ee GE N EE 212 Eie Se Ed ie ee rr 212 HyperTerminal Communication Parameter Settings Example 215 EE eri AE UU T TT 215 AR Ed ME OR EE quip du urbe NE EO OE OE 216 OME ie AS eke LES UT 217 SMT WAN Configuration Static DYynamiC iese ee ee ee ee ee 218 OSME WAN Connguraton PPPOE osse susse EER qae ee es GN WEE OR eaae EER GREG 219 23 List of Figures VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 168 SMT WAN Configuration PPTP 1 rrt E ER DESEE Reik GES EpL SERERE 221 SR RENE be n el Ee EE dex E taa dU 222 Figure 170 SME System SIalUS eise REG EE ORREL DORS EWE De rH adds ee E HR b GR Gee HEG ek Ges 223 Figure 171 SMT Ces Monu uno Con BEEN Ee Ge t C SR CR DER RS ER d 225 Figure 172 SMT Fiimware Upgrade sessie ken ancien rien D UN EIN Vr E ROME 225 Figure 174 SMT Firmware Upgrade Process aiiis cerent tienes cte rra sur asa ER ee GEGEE EEUE ne 226 Figure 174 SMT Change Administrator Password iese se ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ed ee ee ee ee 226 Rea ER IE ca ere E 227 Figure 176 SML System LOGUE RE Baath tito dad dod pay UR ee Ge Ge 227 Figure 177 SMT Reset to Factory Defaults eeuse eer ks Re ERA eee As EE itta annia tna d 228 Figure 178 IP Address Conflicts Scenaro To iasasecec cisci cerieeea ee EE SERS ERGER EER SEERDE RENE peret eda 236 Figure 179 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 2 uses tereti trt noa depo
107. ERK bord GESEENDE IS Ee Ni ES Read a RR 4 260 Figure 196 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties 261 Figure 197 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties iii ese ee ee de ee ee ee 261 Figure 198 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Settings sesse ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 262 Figure 199 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties ees see ees se RR ee eese 263 Figure 200 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu issie rtr aon ith RR haa han hee ge ed 264 Figure 201 Macintosh OS 8 9 TEAM eN iua SENSE MAG GE ea PH ER A ODE ERR de 264 Figure 202 Macintosh OS X Apple ME ocior teat uel Ea ERI ban Ro RR tX Pk orb WE uuu ae 265 Figure 203 Macintosh OS X EE oes erecta i ase ress Ba GG UR ER UR Fr ER RR IRR R 266 List of Figures 24 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 25 List of Figures VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide List of Tables Table 1 Fit Patel LEES si SR EE N Ee Ee ee ee ee oe og ed 41 Table 2 Web Configurator Screen Overview ies ee ee ee EA Ee AA Re ee ee ee ee ee 44 Table 3 System Tools System ACOOUIN 2uececuaseessutbsa seit tua tpa EE RSG NE FER ub SG NEER RS SERE EE 46 Table 4 System seting ed rU 57 Table 5 System Settings WAN LAN LAN Configuration iese ee ee ee ee ee ee 62 Table 6 System Settings WAN LAN WAN MAC Address sse 63 Table 7 System Settings WAN LAN WAN IP ee ee ee ee ee ee Ge RR ee 64 Table 8 Syst
108. Example CAS f EJ DE Internet N vv w Ill The following summarizes the communication steps before Internet access is allowed 1 A hotel guest launches a web browser Chapter 9 Authentication 80 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 2 The VSG redirects the guest s web browser to a login screen at CAS 3 The guest enters the provided access information 4 Once authentication is successful CAS informs VSG to allow Internet access to the guest 9 1 3 Built in Authentication The built in authentication method is useful 1f you do not have a RADIUS server You can use the built in subscriber database to manage the subscribers With the built in authentication the VSG provides three sets of preconfigured scenarios that you can choose for easy and simple setup For billing use either a PMS or the built in billing mechanism to set up accounting information 9 1 4 RADIUS The VSG supports Remote Authentication Dial In user Service RADIUS By integrating RADIUS with the VSG you can set up the subscriber database on the RADIUS server In addition to subscriber information the subscriber database may hold the Internet usage time period each subscriber is allocated For example when a subscriber logs in the RADIUS server will send the time allocation information such as session time out to the VSG which uses this information to control the subscriber s connection 9 1 4 1 RADIUS Accounting The VSG sends accounting s
109. Figure 10 System Tools DES GEREED GREG RE EG a RR ON EHA I NEFANDA TERRE 48 Figure 7 System TOUS LOSDUL yan ets Det o n ee D s Od 48 Figure 18 Initial Setup Network Example iis see ee ee ee ee ee ER EA ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ae 50 Figure 49 System SSUING SSIBITI RE N OE EE ae SUL URP SERA 56 Figure 20 System Settings WAN LAN LAN Configuration sene 62 Figure 21 System Settings WAN LAN WAN MAC Address sse 63 Figure 22 System Settings WAN LAN Dynamic Static WAN IP Address 64 Figure 23 System Settings WAN LAN PPPOE ese sesse see ee dekke seed ks ske ee ed As da teta atta ge eed da 65 Figure 24 System Settings WANLAN PPTP 12er ret rh aque ee Pha guod OES WA GREG EE Y Yo GE EDE KG 67 Figure 25 System Settings SEIS N N NE RPM 3S URP ES Vr edax 71 Figure 26 NAT Exemple One to One iussu AA EDGE SEE EA GE GEE MAAGDE GE AK EDE eN Ad EES BR AA dese ed E 76 Figure 27 NAT Exemple Many to DrIB iss sesse ciini ptu ber aid DRESS WEER GEREG ab td dde Ge eN 77 Figure 28 NAT Example One to One and Many to One ees ee ee ee ee ee ee 77 Figure 29 System Settings NAT Pool EER vr DR GN e EE Ede GE GN COOKER EAR RR RR Se 78 Figure 20 e Aj EE a E E 80 Figure 31 Accounting Usage TRO ee AE tu EA ei Ee Er PA eua Re Ad Ge Be pua GRE de Ad PUDE aad ad 82 Figure 32 System Settings Authentication aiecseterrridinn err SERE ERK SGA GEE PE ER E EFE SAGE EA EE 83 Figure 33 System Auth
110. File Name field 4 Click Apply to start the configuration restore process The VSG automatically restarts after the restoration process is complete 29 4 Reset to the Factory Defaults This section shows you how to reset the device configuration back to the factory defaults If you have forgotten the administrator login password or username you need to use the RESET button Note All your custom configuration will be erased once you reset the VSG You may choose to keep the subscriber account information and the port location mapping settings Follow the steps below to reset the VSG back to the factory default settings 1 Click System Tools Configuration to display the screen as shown next Chapter 29 Configuration 200 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 141 Configuration Reset Configuration This feature can import your saved settings to this device or export the stored settings from this device to your PC Backup Click Backup to save current system configuration from this device to your computer or to the remote TFTP server TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Apply Restore To restore your stored system configuration to this device File Path Browse TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Apply Reset the system back to factory defaults Keep subscriber profile Keep port location mapping profile Apply 2 Scroll down to the Reset the system back to factory defaults section a
111. G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address RE Re EER ERGE ERG ERG Ke GE ee 256 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting eek EER RE knkikl ra BE ER RGN A KERS ke SE ona AK VERE KA Ge KEN Ee ke 268 VEE RE EE EE E E E 276 Table of Contents 18 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 19 Table of Contents VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Application Internet Access for LAN Networks sees ee ee ee GR RR RR de ee 35 Figure 2 Application Internet Access in Public Areas ie ee ee RA Re ee ee ee 36 Figes Application Hotel ies 36 Figure 4 Rack Mount Attaching Brackets issie esse teinte inttr dei tn dne poen 39 Figure 5 Rack Mount Securing to te RACK EERS tt das eh po EAS SEEKS FREE PAS HAE Eg 39 Figure 6 xnl opissa 40 Hitte Beat bard as SN a GE IE rd 41 Figure 8 Entering IP Address in Internet Explorer ise ese s asse ee sesse ee ee ek ee ee ke EE Be ee es 42 Figure o WSR Configurator LOOS iis RNEER RR 3E ENE CERES pP SR ERR E S eoa 43 Figure 10 Web Configurator Main Menu use iss ss steek As ke ee RA Ak SE ee RA Ak AE ae annt th DRA nean ohne 43 Figure 11 Web Configurator Navigation Panel uiers ee GEE EG nennen nennen 44 Figure 12 Navigation Panel Screen specific Links iss eise ee ee ee AE Ge 44 XU A EP oio oc OE OR RR OE OO EE ON 45 Figure Td Apply Restan RE N EE Ea EAD 45 Figure 15 System Tools System Account iius aaa pua teh ka NE ED AA KERE SE RA AE EE Ke EA d 46
112. GEE GEE 198 Configuration Backup TFTP Successful 12er titt EES N REEDE Ge NS BEE 199 Conliguraton Restore e Tc 199 ear ie EI ep Riiie ag er c mien 200 anus Es Gl EN EO 201 SN ira ic OE EA OE v TN 202 Firrmware Manual Upgrade issie SVE rr SUG zat cessus tt Ge etie ed RUG ESE ee DEE Re 202 Web Configurator Firmware Upgrade Successful 203 Firmware Manual Upgrade Using TRIP cescsisscnessiassannsscaecnrsscaseereescensanienves 203 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade Synchronization File Example 204 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade Example esses 204 Firmware Scheduled Upgrade EGGSA SS REPERI Ue GE ENG TUE RENI IHE RENI dA 204 RR AE OE ER rM Rd Tr errr 207 System Settings Server Configuration Enable SSL Security 207 System Settings Authentication Activate SSL Login sssss 208 Installing the SSL Security Certificate First Security Alert 208 Installing the SSL Security Certificate Second Security Alert 209 Installing the SSL Security Certificate View Certificate 209 Installing the SSL Security Certificate Certificate Import Wizard 210 Certificate Import Wizard Location uuum sinn eer rea ER EES AKA ESE RENS ESE x A Ge Gee ie 210 Cerificate Import Wizard FINISH uiuis esta eet od LE
113. HCP Server Private P Pool Starting Address 10 59 1 2 Pool Size 253 Max 512 Lease Time Private 1440 Minutes Lease Time Temporal 5 Minutes DHCP Server Primary DNS Server 158 985 1 1 Secondary DNS Server DHCP Pool Size IP Address or Email Server Redirect SMTP Port If the network ID is different from WAN this function will be disabled automatically P Pool Starting Address Lease Time Public Server Public 253 Max 512 1440 Minutes eo 25 25 2500 2599 Domain Name The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 System Settings Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Web Server Server Port Specify the port number of the embedded web server on the VSG for accessing the web configurator The default port number is 80 Enter a number between 8010 and 8060 to access the web configurator behind a NAT enabled network If you enter a number between 8010 and 8060 you need to append the port number to the WAN or LAN port IP address to access the web configurator For example if you enter 8010 as the web server port number then you must enter http www 192 168 1 1 8010 where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN or LAN port IP address SSL Security Security Secure Socket Layer SSL security allows you to create a secure connection between the VSG and the client computer s Refer to Chapter 31 on page 206 for more information Select this optio
114. HO frewall Best ie eed Internet Security Appliance Client 2004 budget award from ez H Actoher 18 NNa h Mikradatarn e lm zi Welcome Username Password Enter Cancel or click here to pay by credit card El lel Done I Internet 15 2 5 Login Service Selection The service selection messages are available in the subscriber login screen only when you configure the VSG to use PMS billing 125 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 70 Customization Service Selection Customization Service Selection customization Service Selection Message Please choose from the following service se ms hiaracters Purchase Unit Message How many units of Internet access would yo ms haracters Notification Message 1 Please kindly note that there will be no refur ma Notification Message 2 Please note that the time block of selected ms Notification Message 3 TERE EE Additional Remark Please click ENTER to confirm your accepti max 24 The following table describes the related labels Table 35 Customization Service Selection Customization LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Selection Customization Service Selection Enter a message to instruct the subscribers to select a billing profile Messages Purchase Unit Enter a message to instruct the subscribers to select the number of time units to Message purchase Notification Enter additional message s regarding the replenish feature For
115. ION Daily Account Summary ABCAA Monthly Account Summary ABCBB System Status ABCCC Network Statistics ABCAB The following sections describe each report printout in detail Daily Account Summary This report shows the username and price for the subscriber account s that is created for the current day Key combination ABCAA The following figure shows an example Figure 184 SP 200 Daily Account Daily Account 2004 10 28 Username Price 9v269m55 10 00 bwh2y943 20 00 TOTAL ACCOUTNS 2 TOTAL PRICE 30 00 2004 10 28 14 12 11 End Monthly Account Summary This report shows the username and price for the subscriber account s that is created for the current month Key combination ABCBB 247 Appendix E Report Printing Using the SP 200 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following figure shows an example Figure 185 SP 200 Monthly Account Monthly Account 2004 10 Username Price bwh2y936 10 00 Cindy 10 00 9v269m55 10 00 bwh2y943 20 00 OTAL ACCOUTNS 4 OTAL PRICE 50 00 2004 10 28 14 11 26 End System Status This report shows the current system information such as the host name and WAN IP address Key combination ABC CC The following figure shows an example Appendix E Report Printing Using the SP 200 248 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 186 SP 200 System Status System Status WAST ESTA
116. L Glossary and Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you Syntax Convention Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example click the Apple icon Control Panels and then Modem means first click the Apple icon then point your mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem e For brevity s sake we will use e g as a shorthand for for instance and i e for that is or in other words throughout this manual The VSG 1200 V2 Vantage Service Gateway may be referred to as the VSG 1200 V2 or simply as the VSG in this User s Guide Preface 30 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Graphics Icons Key VSG 1200 V2 Ii Computer Notebook computer em iB
117. LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Route Table This table displays the static routes configured No This field displays the index number Destination IP This field displays the IP address of the final destination Address Destination This field displays the subnet mask of the final destination Subnet Mask Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Address Hop Count This field displays the cost of this static route Interface This field displays the name of the interface this static route is applied Chapter 28 System Status 194 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 195 Chapter 28 System Status VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Configuration This chapter shows you how to back up restore or reset the configuration on the VSG 29 1 Configuration Overview The configuration file contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password DHCP Setup TCP IP Setup etc Once you have customized the settings of the VSG they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing There is not a specific file extension or filename conventions that you need to follow Therefore you can specify any name or file extension the configuration files It is recommended that you to use the rom file extension for the configuration file for management purposes You can use the Configuration screen in the web configurator to back up and restore configuration or reset the device to
118. Login Screen Example Advanced sss 124 Customization Login Sereen Frame iese ciat br xt pabula Se N Ge ce I DRE Uvada 124 Subscriber Login Screen Example Frame esse see se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 125 Customization Service Selection Customization ee ee ee 126 Subscriber Login Screen Example Service Selection Messages 126 Customization Information Window iis dore GEE bk kn Line 127 Subscriber Pop up Information Window Example seseeeeeeeeee 128 Customization Account PMOL is bo e etie o t Et ee ee aS 129 Static Account Printout Example ies ERGE Pe ene Er Fa e AER bean MEER REI QURA E bee n 131 Static Account with PMS Billing Printout Example sees 131 Static Account Printout Statement Printer Example iss ese ese ee ee se n 132 Static Account with PMS Billing Printout Statement Printer Example 132 Dynamic Account Frimout EXAMP iiie iter torre Fb e n det ea 133 Dynamic Account Printout Statement Printer Example 133 CUSTOMIZE User AFGEE em 134 21 List of Figures VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 82 Customization Account Printout Preview ius resies sees es ee Re AE nmm 135 Figure 83 Credit Card Customization Standard Login Screen Message 135 Figure 84 Credit Card Customization Standard Login Screen Message Preview
119. N PPTP LAN WAN MAC Address WAN Port Mode WANILAN IP Address 10 53 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default C Changeto 00 00 DO J00 j00 00 C Get automatically from a DHCP server C Use fixed IP address C PPPoE Mostly for ADSL modem users PPTP Mostly for Europe ADSL modem users PPTP Local IP Address PPTP Local Subnet Mask PPTP Local Default Getway PPTP Server IP Address Username Password PPP MTU Setting 1460 option TCP MSS Setting 1400 option Connection ID Name option Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 10 Min C Keep alive Redial Period 30 Sec The following table describes the related fields in this screen Table 9 System Settings WAN LAN PPTP FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN Port Mode PPTP Select this option to activate PPTP support Refer to Section 6 5 4 on page 66 for more information PPTP Local IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to you PPTP Local Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask assigned to you PPTP Local Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway device Username Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above PPP MTU Setting Enter the size of a Maximum Transmission Unit MTU
120. Note All your custom configuration including the system usernames and passwords will be erased This will NOT delete the subscriber database or the port location mappings Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 40 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 2 2 2 Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel When turned on all LEDs are green unless otherwise specified Table1 Front Panel LEDs LED STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR On The VSG is receiving power Off The VSG is not receiving power SYS On The system is functioning normally Blinking The system is not functioning properly Off The system is not ready or has failed LAN or WAN 10 On The port is connected at 10 Mbps Blinking The port is receiving or sending data Off The port is not connected to an Ethernet device 100 On The port is connected at 100 Mbps Blinking The port is receiving or sending data Off The port is not connected to an Ethernet device 2 2 3 Rear Panel The power socket the fan and a ventilation hole are located on the rear panel as shown next Note Do NOT block the ventilation hole Figure 7 Rear Panel 2 2 4 Turning on the VSG Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the power socket on the back of the VSG and the male end to an appropriate power source When the power source is turned on the PWR LED on the front panel turns on 41 Chapter 2 Hard
121. P IP Client This field displays the IP address of the client computer Port Client This field displays the port number through which the client computer transmits the traffic Port Fake This field displays the virtual port number for a session Port Remote This field displays the port number of a remote device the client computer accesses Chapter 28 System Status 188 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 64 System Status Session List continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Idle This field displays the number of seconds of inactivity for a session Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page 28 6 NAT Pool Table The VSG provides a NAT address pool feature for use with VPN It allows subscribers to connect to remote VPN servers that allow only one connection per source IP address Click System Status and NAT Pool Table to open the screen shown next This screen displays the LAN and WAN IP addresses that are currently being used as well the VPN types Figure 126 System Status NAT Pool Table 1 192 168 100 1 2 192 168 100 2 3 192 168 100 3 NAT Pool information Source IP address Source MAC address and Translated IP address No Source IP Address Source MAC
122. P server needs to check my account Username Password Send to Email Name E Email From Email CC Address Email Address 1 Email Address 2 Email To Chapter 24 Syslog 170 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Logs Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Server Select Enable to activate the syslog function Select Disable to de activate the Syslog function Syslog on LAN Select this check box to specify a syslog server on the LAN Server IP Address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation of the syslog server on the LAN Server MAC Enter the MAC address of the syslog server on the LAN Address Syslog on WAN Select this check box to specify a syslog server on the WAN Server 1 IP Enter the IP address of the first syslog server on the WAN in dotted decimal Address notation Server 2 IP Enter the IP address of the second syslog server on the WAN in dotted decimal Address notation Send to Email Select Enable to have the VSG send logs to the specified email address Select Disable to deactivate this feature In this case you can only view the log information on the VSG or the syslog server s Email Server IP Address or Enter the IP address or domain name of the mail server Domain Name SMTP Port Enter the port number for SMTP email service on the mail server E mail SMTP Select this option if
123. Please activate your account before XXXXIXXIXX XX XX XX Email this webpage to myself Use this account to LOGIN now 15 6 4 Fail Page You can customize the notification screen to display on the subscriber s computer when the credit card is not validated or the transaction is not successful Scroll down the Credit Card Customization screen and configure the Fail Page fields and click Apply to save the changes Figure 89 Credit Card Customization Fail Page Fail Page Customize the message for the fail page ificati SORRY your card could not be processed at this til Notification Message 1 SORRY your card could not be processed at this ti Max 180 characters EG EES Please use your backspace button and try again wi Max 1 m k you Notification Message 3 des dees Try Again Clase Try Again Button Close Button Q Preview of Fail Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Credit Card Customization Fail Page LABEL DESCRIPTION Notification Enter additional message s For example why the transaction failed Message 1 3 Try Again Button Enter the label name for the button subscribers click to display the screen in which the subscribers can enter the credit card information again 141 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 41 Credit Card Customization Fail Page continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Close
124. Printout Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username 20000000 Password 3000000 Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 S N 000001 2006 6 16 14 50 56 Please active your account before 2006 6 17 02 50 56 Thank you very much Figure 80 Dynamic Account Printout Statement Printer Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username ooooooo Password ooooooo Usage Time Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 2006 6 16 14 51 56 S N 000001 Please active your accou nt before 2006 6 17 02 51 56 Thank you very much 15 5 User Agreement Screen In cases where authentication is not required and anyone can access the Internet through the VSG you can set the VSG to require users to accept a service usage agreement before they can access the Internet The VSG has a built in user agreement page that you can customize To customize the user agreement page click Advanced Setting Customization and click the User Agreement Page link to display the screen as shown 133 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 81 Customize User Agreement Title Title Text Color Article Article Text Color Page Background Color Agree Button Disagree Button Art
125. RIPTION Concurrent This field displays how many computers are logged in using this account Access Print Click the icon to print the account information of the selected account Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page Apply Click Apply to save the changes 11 5 1 Static Account Information Print Preview To display a printout preview of static account information click the Print icon to display a printout preview window showing the account information An example is shown in the following figure Refer to Section 15 4 on page 129 to configure the printout page 101 Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 50 Static Account Information Printout Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username Cindy Password h9fcpcds Usage Time 1 day Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 Username Cindy Password h9fcpc4s Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 2006 6 15 17 45 26 11 6 Viewing the Static Account List To display the static account list click Static Account List Figure 51 Static Account List
126. RIPTION URL Link Enter the web site address of a portal page Apply Click Apply to save the settings Chapter 17 Portal Page Advertisement Link and Walled Garden 148 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 17 3 Advertisement Links You can set the VSG to display an advertisement web page first on the subscriber s computer once connected to the Internet Click Advanced and Advertisement to display the screen as shown next Figure 97 Advertisement Frequency Sequence Link 1 Link 2 Link3 Link 4 Link 5 Link 6 Link 7 Link 8 Link 9 Link 10 Advertisement One Time Only C Every 0 Min s Randomly C Orderly From 1 to 10 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advertisement LABEL DESCRIPTION Frequency Select One Time Only to display an advertisement web site in a pop up browser window once after a subscriber logs in successfully Select Every Min s to display an advertisement web site in a pop up browser window once every time period specified between 1 and 60 minutes after a subscriber logs in successfully Sequence Select Randomly to display the advertisement web pages in random order Select In Order to display the advertisement web pages in the order as configured Link 1 10 Enter the web site addresses in the fields provided Apply Click Apply to save the changes 17 4 Walled Garden A subscriber must log in before the VSG allows th
127. RUM ER lait be buk 104 12 1 Dynamic Subscriber Account Overview ie RE ESE EE IAE OES EES QUERER EE Gee Ge ee 104 12 2 Dynamic Account General Setings 1 oret RO rr tie Ret one Pede uda 104 12 3 Creating Dynamic AGCOUTIS ses EG Ge ME Ge Ge Ge 106 12 3 1 Dynamic Account Generation Using the Web Configurator 106 12 3 2 Dynamic Account Generation Using a Statement Printer 107 124 Viewing the Dynamic Account List AA AE EN 108 12 4 1 Backing Up the Dynamic Account List sesse sesse see ee ee Ee ee Re ee 109 Chapter 13 Port Eocati n Mapping asses sake dee SN dd a 112 13 1 Port Location Mapping Overview ees ERAS SEN GES EA EE Bee SR EE ed ke 112 13 2 Configuring Port Locati n Mappings musse see EES rri Ev ee Gee BEREG bee EE Ee 112 Chapter 14 Credit Cardiccia diaaa EG KS WS sania Rd Ke Ko ie be Se die Ge ie 116 AE eke re Ee ERa 116 14 1 1 How Credit Card Billing WORS osse EE ER RE rtt Ge Ve 116 TIT AR GE pE ks sl AA ON ER 116 14 2 Credit Card Billing Service Configuration EER REEN ER EES GE ERA GAS GE EER AGE GE Ee aaa 117 Chapter 15 Gustora REIN oceans cape via aba iban VER Ge en oe ee AE ie DM 120 15 1 Gustormization Verde osse NEE cbe Exe a det De bed Ge ee ned Ee GENE Fac UR NE EEND 120 TALON SEED des ke EE T ee GE He 120 16 21 Standard Login SOBER sissies ELE GESE SS GEE GE crt datura cct GERS Ge GED GEE E eN Ge 121 19 2 2 RUMSOC Esc eo GE ge 122 122 2 vae LOGIT SEEM EER T I GEE GEEN 123 13 Table
128. Restart System Y N 2 Type Y and press ENTER to restart the VSG Otherwise type N and press ENTER to cancel the action and return to the main menu 32 11 SMT Logout To log out of the SMT enter 7 in the main menu screen A Logout System Y N prompt displays Enter Y to log out Figure 176 SMT System Logout Logout System Y N 32 12 Factory Defaults If you forgot your administrator login user name and password you have to use the RESET button to reset the VSG back to the factory defaults Refer to Chapter 2 on page 38 Resetting the VSG restores all system configuration back to the factory defaults However you may retain the subscriber account information Note All system settings will be lost once you reset to the default settings Press ESC to return to the Main Menu screen Follow the steps below to reset the VSG back to the factory defaults 1 In the main menu type 8 and press ENTER A screen displays prompting you to confirm 2 Type Y and press ENTER to reset the VSG 227 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 3 Type Y and press ENTER to retain the subscriber account information in the local subscriber database Type N and press ENTER to delete all subscriber account information 4 Press ENTER to reset the VSG The VSG automatically restarts Figure 177 SMT Reset to Factory Defaults Change to factory defaults and the system will be restart
129. Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Start Date Specify the month and day that your daylight savings time starts on if you select Daylight Savings End Date Specify the month and day that your daylight savings time ends on if you select Daylight Savings NAT Network NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for Address example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a Translation different IP address known within another network Select Enable to activate Network Address Translation NAT Enable this feature to set your VSG to map multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is the default selection Select Disable to deactivate NAT IP Plug and Select this option to allow plug and play Internet access which means that Play iPnP subscribers do not have to change their network settings This feature is activated Technology by default DNS Fake IP Select this option to assign private IP address to a network device such as the e Reply mail server NAT will translate the private IP address to the public IP address on the WAN Chapter 5 System 58 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 4 System Setting System continued LABEL DESCRIPTION User Session Limit You can set
130. Server EN Statement Printer Access Point Oo Switch Router Internet C e 31 Preface VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know Your VSG This chapter introduces the features and applications of the VSG 1 1 Introducing the VSG The VSG 1200 V2 Vantage Service Gateway is a rack mountable service gateway that provides multiple subscribers easy Internet connectivity The VSG is ideal for office hotspot and hotel network environments Hotspots are public areas such as airports hotels coffee shops where end users or subscribers can access the Internet at any time 1 2 Features Your VSG provides the following features to accommodate subscribers with a variety of network configurations with little or no technical support Property Management System PMS Many hotels use a PMS to perform automatic billing of services the guests use such as room service mini bar pay per view TV or telephone calls The VSG supports PMS from Micros Fidelios CAS Central Authentication Service The Hilton Group Corporation developed the High Speed Internet Access HSIA service to provide Internet access service across its entire Hilton Group hotels In order to use the HSIA hotel guest s must be authenticated through the proprietary CAS The CAS performs both user authentication and accounting Credit Card Billing Your VSG is integrated with various online credit card
131. Successful Enter a message to notify the subscribers that the credit card validation is Message successful Notification Enter additional message s For example you may enter a refund policy Message 1 2 Account Enter the caption for the account information Information Username Enter the label name for the username field Password Enter the label name for the password field Usage Time Enter the label name for the usage time field Expiration Date Enter the label name for the expiration date field Email Button Enter the label name for the e mail button the subscribers click to have the VSG e mail this information in this screen to the subscribers Submit Button Enter the label name for the button the subscribers click to confirm and log in for Preview of Successful Page Click Preview of Successful Page for a preview screen see Figure 88 on page 141 for an example Chapter 15 Customization 140 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following figure shows an example Figure 88 Credit Card Customization Successful Page Preview Welcome You may now use the Internet IMPORTANT Make a note of your username and password for logging in later This will be your only opportunity to do so Note upper and lowercase letters This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Your username is XXXXXXXX Your password is XXXXXXXX Your usage time is XX XX XX
132. The function enables administrator to limit bandwidth usage according to the RADIUS vendor specific attribute RADIUS authentication or billing profile setting Built in authentication This allows every user to have a different service quality for Internet bandwidth Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 146 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 147 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Portal Page Advertisement Link and Walled Garden This chapter shows you how to set a portal web site advertisement links and create walled garden web sites 17 1 Overview When you enable subscriber authentication in the Authentication Configuration screen you can set the VSG to redirect a subscriber to a portal web site display advertisement links or activate the walled garden feature for generating on line advertising revenue 17 2 Portal Page A portal page is the first web site to which a subscriber is redirected after logging in successfully If you do not specify a portal web site the subscriber will be directed to the intended web site specified Click Advanced and Portal Page to display the screen as shown next Figure 96 Portal Page Portal Page This feature allows to redirect subscriber s browser to a specified portal page after successful login URL Link Gipy The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Portal Page LABEL DESC
133. This field displays the time since the system was last restarted WATD This field displays the number of packets transmitted on the WAN WARD This field displays the number of packets received on the WAN WATE This field displays the number of error packets transmitted on the WAN WARE This field displays the number of error packets received on the WAN LATD This field displays the number of packets transmitted on the LAN LARD This field displays the number of packets received on the LAN LATE This field displays the number of error packets transmitted on the LAN LARE This field displays the number of error packets received on the LAN 251 Appendix E Report Printing Using the SP 200 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Appendix F Cable Types and Cable Pin Assignments RJ 45 Ethernet Port The following table describes the types of network cable used for the different connection speeds Note Make sure the Ethernet cable length between connections does not exceed 100 meters 328 feet Table 95 Network Cable Types SPEED NETWORK CABLE TYPE 10 Base TX 100 2 pair UTP STP Category 3 4 or 5 100 Base TX 100 2 pair UTP STP Category 5 The WAN Port The following table describes the Ethernet cable pin assignments for the WAN port Table 96 WAN Port Cable Ping Assignments PIN NO RJ 45 SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT DESIGNATION 1 Output Transmit Data TD 12 8456 78 2 Input Transmit Data RD 3 Inp
134. VSG 1200 V2 Vantage Service Gateway User s Guide Version 1 00 10 2006 Edition 1 ZyXEL VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Copyright Copyright O 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 2 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the followi
135. Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com Certifications 3 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page Certifications 4 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 23
136. able 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page sss 138 Credit Card Customization Successful Page i iis de ee dd ee AA ee 140 Credit Card Customization Fail Page issie EE EEN EEDEN EE EE GENE EER EG NG SEER EE 141 Customization Output BI ss ER GR GR erro ER GE aae i aeu 143 Bandwidth Management Equal Share iis ee ss eee ee ARE Be ee Aa 146 Porral PAJO EE N N N 148 DUCHESS IE OR RE EE ES bia REM EANA 149 Gr cCELRCDL Mee rrt 150 Passthrough Subscriber IP and MAC Address see ee see ee ee ER ER Re Re ee 153 Passthrough Destination URL and IP enean tne 154 acm 156 i o US M e EE 158 BS NE cc cL 161 Advanced Stalio ROUTE issie EE De 165 Advanced Private LAN OR EO EE EA OE ed 169 Lok oo o eU 171 Loge Log R mus ORE ie 172 Ee eed Se ya wa ee ed OT 173 Advanced Session TRACE ss ER ER GEL RE GE Oe KG Ge Ee Ie Gee 176 Sosson Mace File FIORI is ie rtp PR eia aea GE GR oe ee RN 177 ir ae TR 180 vlies dT ER seme tecti coouicucr sense aN aa i 183 System SIDE eN EA OE EE EE N i bd ad 185 System Status Current User List AA OE EE EL ndn ran 187 System Status DHOF COMS 2e dee GU wd dux asa ena tb pa ac N 188 System Status Session List ss skede ELKE eto rh di Ku ke EN e Kn EA IY Ee ipa ee Ek ki 188 System Status NAT Tool Table iss EER EE ESE RR NN E EERS GESE E ERKEN eet GEE GEE EED
137. ackup to save current system configuration from this device to your computer or to the remote TFTP server 4 Click Apply When the file transfer process is complete a screen displays as follows Chapter 29 Configuration 198 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 138 Configuration Backup TFTP Successful Success The Export Configuration has been transferred _ 29 3 Restore Configuration This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration Note This function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk 1 Click System Tools and Configuration A screen displays as shown next Figure 139 Configuration Restore Configuration This feature can import your saved settings to this device or export the stored settings from this device to your PC Backup Click Backup to save current system configuration from this device to your computer or to the remote TFTP server TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Apply Restore To restore your stored system configuration to this device File Path Browse Apply TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Reset the system back to factory defaults Keep subscriber profile Keep port location mapping profile Apply 2 In the Restore section specify the location and filename of a configuration file in th
138. address always follow the guidelines above Note For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 6 3 3 DNS Server Address DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for example the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it The DNS server addresses that you enter in the DHCP setup are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The first is for an ISP to tell a customer the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when s he signs up The second is to obtain the DNS server information automatically when a computer is set as a DHCP client 61 Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 6 4 LAN Configuration To configure the LAN settings on the VSG click System Settings and WAN LAN to display the screen as shown Figure 20 System Settings WAN LAN LAN Configuration WANILAN IP Address 10 59 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default C Changeto 00 DO DO j00 j00 00 Get automatically from a DHCP server WAN MAC Address C Use fixed IP address WAN Po
139. ales zyxel ru 7 095 542 89 25 Moscow 117279 Russia support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications SPAIN Arte 21 5 planta sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 28033 Madrid Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S SWEDEN Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden support ua zyxel com 380 44 247 69 78 www ua zyxel com ZyXEL Ukraine UKRAINE 13 Pimonenko Str sales ua zyxel com 380 44 494 49 32 Kiev 04050 Ukraine support zyxel co uk 44 1344 303044 www zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK 08707 555779 UK only Ltd 11 The Courtyard UNITED KINGDOM Eastern Road Bracknell sales zyxel co uk 44 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK Customer Support VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table of Contents DEBBIE Ee N E E ie N ds xci ca PUES ex AE er 2 SPERO DS oen AE FRA UQEEUGARE N 3 ate WARRIES dese SE da leri dn Maa Rid eed Pa qd be T aus inar KE I RA Va e vua 5 ZYXEL Limited Warren RA pina SG ed RS Ge AE EG ANN De se ER Gad Va ed Ad RARE Ak RES 7 RS PIE SIPPO METER 8 seid PERG osse E AG Denn RU UN RET N Ga ee 20 BEN ELIO EMI NS T net 26 PET IE E Lus cordia ia LE X oe ok ed Ge Hs de a E XA Ge OE EE GR E ke Y d ER TURNER TAA MIR 30 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG ss Essie dee de N e yer E a ee aaaea de N ee Ge le 32 1 1 ese seke sd ie EE EE 32 E ECCL wea a cea rata cer 32 SET niu ARE OE EO EE EE EN 35 1 3 1 Int
140. ame of the person to contact in case there is any problem with the VSG Contact Telephone Enter the telephone number of the person to contact in case there is any problem with the VSG Contact Fax Enter the fax number of the person to contact in case there is any problem with the VSG Contact Email Enter the e mail address of the person to contact in case there is any problem with the VSG Date Time To manually set the system date and time select the appropriate choices from the Date and Time drop down list boxes Click Get from my Computer to set the time and date on the VSG to be the same as the computer that you use to configure the VSG If you select Use NTP Network Time Protocol Time Server option and set the necessary fields you can click Get from NTP Server to update the time and date on the VSG from the NTP time server Use NTP Network Select this option to have the VSG get the date and time information from a time Time Protocol server Time Server Server IP Enter the IP address or the domain name of the time server Check with your ISP Domain Name network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Select your time zone from the drop down list box This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Update Time Enter the number of hours between updates Daylight Select this option if you use daylight savings time
141. ant ID number that you received from iValidate Terminal ID Enter the terminal ID number that you received from iValidate Secure Server Enter the address of the iValidate gateway The default value is https Address silverado trivalley com merchant processcc aspl Note You don t need to change this address unless instructed by iValidate administrator World Pay Select this option if you have a payment account from WorldPay Payment Enter the address of the WorldPay gateway The default value is https Gateway select worldpay com wcc purchase Note You don t need to change this address unless instructed by WorldPay administrator Installation ID Enter the payment account ID Enter the unique reference number assigned by WorldPay This is the number the VSG send to WorldPay in the payment process You may get two WorldPay IDs one for testing and one for payment processing Currency Code Enter the code for the currency charged For example USD Description Enter a descriptive note about the purchase For example Internet Access Test Mode WorldPay provides you with a test account that allows you to test the credit card processing on your site The test account works the same as the real account except that no funds are actually transferred For more information refer to the document on the WorldPay web site Select Test Mode to use the account for testing purposes Select S
142. ap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events Network Management System NMS An NMS Network Management System is a management station that receives traps the system alerts generated If no NMS is defined then no traps are generated 26 2 Configuring SNMP Click Advanced Settings and SNMP to display the screen as shown next Figure 119 SNMP SNMP SNMP C Enable Disable SNMP Port 161 161 or 16100 16199 Trap Port 182 162 or 16200 15299 No Community Name NMS Address Privileges Status 1 pubic ANY Read Vaia v 2 pvee ANY Write Vaia z Configuration 3 e T Reed ME nveia E 4 pw Read A Invalid 7 5 ANY Read A invalid 7 179 Chapter 26 SNMP VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Select Enable to activate SNMP support Select Disable to de activate the SNMP support Port SNMP Port Enter a port number on the VSG for SNMP management The default is 161 Otherwise enter a port number between 16100 and 16199 Trap Port Enter a port number on the VSG for sending SNMP traps The default is 162 Otherwise enter a port number between 16200 and 16299 Configuration No This read only field displays the index number of the entry Community Name Enter the community string or the password of the management station
143. ap to the port number in the Server Port field Device IP Address Enter the IP address of a LAN device in dotted decimal notation For example 10 59 1 111 Device Server Port Enter the port number of a management service for example 80 for HTTP on the LAN device MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN device in hexadecimal notation in 6 hexadecimal pairs for example 0050BA8D2296 Note Make sure you enter the correct MAC address Application Select an application type from the drop down list box Choose from TCP or UDP Only requests for the selected application type are forwarded to the specified server port on the LAN device Delete Click Delete All to remove all accounts Click Delete to remove the selected account 161 Chapter 21 LAN Devices VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 51 LAN Devices continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page Apply Click Apply to save the changes 21 2 1 LAN Device Management Example In this example there is a manageable switch and a wireless access point behind the VSG and you want to be able to remotely access the web based management interfaces on the ma
144. atch Numbers Status C No Charge Charge for use Blocked Add to List Note Use only numbers for the Location Identifier field and Port Identifier field Back Se Remote TFTP Server IP Address File Name Apply Local PC File Path Browse Apply Remote TFTP Server IP Address File Name Apply j Port Location Mapping eo E Page md ao TE 1 m EIE o won Poni Desetpion Status Duet Delete All M First 4 Previous Next gt End M The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 System Setting Port Location Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Single Create Set the related fields to create a port location mapping one at a time Location Identifier ID Enter an identity up to 20 characters for a mapping This field must match the VLAN ID of a port Port Identifier ID Enter the an ID number between 1 and 999999 of a port for this mapping This is the location ID number you set in the PMS Description Enter a description up to 32 characters for this mapping for identification purposes Status Select No Charge if you don t want to bill a subscriber accessing the Internet at this port location Select Charge for use to bill a subscriber accessing the Internet at this port location Select Blocked to stop any subscriber from accessing the Internet at this port location Add to List Click Add to List to insert a new
145. ation that comes with your RADIUS server for more information VSG 1200 V2 Supported VSAs The following table describes the VSGs specific to the VSG 1200 V2 Appendix D Vendor Specific Attributes 242 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 90 VSG 1200 V2 Supported VSAs NO NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE VALUE Traffic Limit This attribute defines total bandwidth in Mbytes allowed for a subscriber Internet access is based on the total upload download bandwidth regardless of the account expiration time This attribute is supported when you set the VSG to use an external RADIUS server for user authentication in accumulation mode Integer maximum 4095 SMTP Redirect This attribute indicates whether the VSG is to re direct E mails Values 0 do not redirect e mails 1 allow e mail redirection Note To allow e mail redirection you must configure the SMTP settings on the VSG Refer to Section Server on page 70 for more information Integer 0 1 BW Up This attribute defines the upload bandwidth allowed for a subscriber Internet access is based on the upload bandwidth regardless of the account expiration time This means that a subscriber is allowed to access the Internet until the total upload bandwidth allocated is reached This attribute is supported when you enable bandwidth management on the VSG with the class of service based on the RADIUS settings Refer to Chapter 16 Bandwidt
146. ber and the two remaining octets make up the host ID Ina class C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting 268 P 660HW T v2 Users Guide The following table shows the network number and host ID arrangement for classes A B and C Table 100 Classes of IP Addresses IP ADDRESS OCTET 1 OCTET 2 OCTET 3 OCTET 4 Class A Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Class B Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Class C Network number Network number Network number Host ID An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 for example Therefore to determine the total number of hosts allowed in a network deduct two as shown next A class C address 1 host octet 8 host bits can have 28 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 2 host octets 16 host bits can have 216 _ 2 or 65534 hosts A class A address 3 host octets 24 host bits can have 274 2 hosts or approximately 16 million hosts IP Address Classes and Network ID The value of the first octet of an IP address determines the class of an address Class A addresses have a 0 in the leftmost bit Class B addresses have a 1 in the leftmost bit and a 0 in the next leftmost bit Class C ad
147. can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones 1s the broadcast address on the subnet Table 107 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER seed E IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting 272 P 660HW T v2 Users Guide Table 107 Subnet 1 continued LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 108 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VADE ANI BI IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 111
148. can have on each subnet Table 105 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 271 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting P 660HW T v2 User s Guide Table 105 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER SPS LOCIER EIT VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 106 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 2 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that
149. ccesses the Internet again within the time period specified in the Idle Timeout field the subscriber does not have to enter the user name and password again to log in Time to Finish Select this option to allow each subscriber a one time login If a subscriber logs out before the allocated time expires the subscriber does not have to enter the user name and password to access the Internet again Primary Secondary Server IP Address Enter the IP address of a RADIUS server in dotted RADIUS Server decimal notation Authentication Port Specify the authentication port of the RADIUS server The common port numbers are 1645 and 1812 Accounting Port Specify the accounting port of the RADIUS server The common port numbers are 1646 and 1813 Secret Key Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the RADIUS server and the VSG The key is not sent over the network Note This key must be the same on the RADIUS server and the VSG Retry Attempts when Specify the number of times 1 to 3 the VSG resends an authentication Primary fail request to the primary and or secondary RADIUS servers Chapter 9 Authentication 84 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 17 System Settings Authentication continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Accounting Service Select Enable from the drop down list box to activate the accounting feature and enter the time in minutes between upda
150. ce Overview You can set the VSG to send session information of subscribers accessing the Internet The VSG records the session information and stores it temporary Once the session trace information reaches a maximum of 50 records or the specified time period is reached the VSG sends the session information to the specified TFTP server 25 1 1 Configuring Session Trace To configure the VSG to send subscriber session information click Advanced Session Trace to display the screen as shown Figure 116 Advanced Session Trace Session Trace Session Trace C Enable Disable Primary TFTP Server IP ME Address Secondary TFTP Server IP EEG Address Send Session Trace log file every 10 minutes 5 1440 Note Session Trace log file will be sent also when collected 50 logs TFTP Server IP Address The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Session Trace LABEL DESCRIPTION Session Trace Select Enable to set the VSG to record and send subscriber session information Select Disable to de activate this feature Chapter 25 Session Trace 176 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 57 Advanced Session Trace continued LABEL DESCRIPTION TFTP Server IP Specify the primary and or secondary TFTP IP address in the Primary TFTP Server Address IP Address and or Secondary TFTP IP Address fields Enter the IP address es in dotted decimal notation For example 192
151. change File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech Startup Disk Text USB Printer Sharing Figure 201 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP TCP IP Comect vla Setup Contigure DHCP Client ID IP Address Subnet mask Router address Marne server addr Using DHCP Server t l lt will be supplied by server gt lt will be supplied by server gt lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans lt will be supplied by server gt 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 264 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your VSG 1200 V2 in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your VSG 1200 V2 and restart your computer 1f prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to
152. click Enter Depending on the settings in the VSG either the specified web page or an advertisement web page displays After a successful login an information window may display Figure 183 Subscriber Login Information Window Example Information Window You can use Internet now This is an information window to show the usage and notice You can type http 1 1 1 1 info to open this window again without VPN connection Remaining Usage hh mm ss Appendix C Subscriber Login 240 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 241 Appendix C Subscriber Login VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Appendix D Vendor Specific Attributes This appendix describes the format of the vendor specific attributes supported Overview With RADIUS server authentication you can define vendor specific attributes VSAs in addition to the set of standard RADIUS attributes defined in RFC 2865 and RFC 2866 A VSA is an attribute value pair that is sent between a RADIUS server and the VSG It is necessary you define the VSAs on the RADIUS sever if you want the VSG to perform any of the additional functions listed below Limit Download bandwidth per subscriber Limit Upload bandwidth per subscriber Limit Total traffic bandwidth allowed per subscriber Specify advertising web site per subscriber Enable disable SMTP redirect Note Before you can make use of these functions configure the proprietary VSAs on the RADIUS server Refer to the document
153. consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices Chapter 26 SNMP 178 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 26 1 1 The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations e Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Tr
154. count List screen write down a customer account user name and password 2 Log out from the web configurator 3 Make sure your computer is set to use a dynamic IP address and is connected to the LAN port on the VSG E about blank Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt amp A Qsearch 3g Address www zyxel com 4 Open a web browser and enter any web site address for example www zyxel com 5 A Welcome screen displays EES prompting you to enter the account information meme Password 6 Enter the customer account Enter Cancel user name and password you wrote down in step 1 Click Enter 7 An Information Window screen displays This IER indicates that you have successfully logged into the VSG z Information Window and Internet access is allowed You can use Internet now ME EE EE gate without VPN connection Remaining Usage 23 53 20 Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example 54 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 5 System This chapter describes the System screen where you can configure general device settings and set up the system time and date 5 1 General System Setting The System screen displays first when you access the web configurator The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain
155. count expires This field displays N A when total bandwidth limitation is enforced on this account Refer to Section 9 1 4 2 on page 82 and Appendix D on page 242 for more information IP Address This field displays the IP address of the subscriber s computer MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the computer that is logged in using this account Disconnect Select this check box and click Disconnect to log out the selected subscriber Click Disconnect All to log out all subscribers Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page 28 4 DHCP Client The DHCP client table shows current DHCP client information of all network clients using the DHCP server on the VSG Click System Status and DHCP to display the screen as shown The DHCP Clients screen automatically updates every 5 seconds Chapter 28 System Status VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 124 System Status DHCP Clients DHCP Clients Private IP No MAC Address IP Address 1 OO OF FE 32 B4 12 10 59 1 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 System Status DHCP Clients LABEL DESCRIPTION No This field displays the index number of an entry MAC Address This field displays the MAC addr
156. count information file and click Apply File Path Browse Apply mm sap o 9 95 Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Manually Add Subscriber Account No Username Password Billing Profile 1 l EE Profile 1 2 EE EE EI Profile 1 3 N D Profile 1 4 ars TE Profile 1 5 EE EET Profile 1 B sd Profile 1 7 mn ss Profile 1 z 8 EE EE Profile 1 s 9 1 1 Profile 1 10 E E Profile 1 There are two ways to create static subscriber accounts as described in the following sections 11 3 1 Generating Static Accounts Automatically To generate a list of static subscriber accounts automatically set the fields in Generate a batch of static accounts in the Create Static Subscriber Account screen Figure 43 Create Static Subscriber Account Generate Automatically Generate a batch of static accounts This feature can automatically generate a series of specific numbers of accounts like hotel rooms Prefix From 0 Maximum 5 numbers Postfix To 0 Maximum 5 numbers Billing Profile Profile 1 7 Random Password Length 8 7 Note For PMS billing type use only numbers for subscriber accounts The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 23 Create Static Subscriber Account Generate Automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Generate a batch of static accounts Prefix Specify the s
157. credit card billing function No PMS device is Welcome needed Username Password I 41 Please choose from the following service selection 1 day 10 00 gt How many units of Internet access would you like to purchase 1 7 Please kindly note that there will be no refund once connectivity is confirmed Please note that the time block of selected service is based on continuous usage Please click ENTER to confirm your acceptance of the usage charge or CANCEL to exit The selected service charge will be posted directly into your guest folio Enter Cancel or click here to pay by credit card va 87 Chapter 9 Authentication VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Billing This chapter shows you how to set up subscriber billing profiles and PMS Property Management System configuration 10 1 Billing Overview A billing profile contains information such as time unit unit cost and or account expiration time You must associate a subscriber account with a billing profile In addition for PMS billing subscribers may have a choice of purchasing additional time blocks with different billing profiles you set and activate on the VSG 10 1 1 Billing Profile You can create up to ten billing profiles on the VSG Click System Setting Billing and the Billing Profile link to display the screen as shown next Figure 37 System Setting Billing Billing Profile Billing Profile Currency Number of decimals places 2
158. d and specify the label name of the field in which subscribers enter the country Phone Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of a field in whish subscribers enter the phone numbers Chapter 15 Customization 138 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 39 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fax Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of the field in which subscribers enter the fax numbers Preview of the Click Preview of the Service Selection Page for a preview screen see Figure 86 Service Selection on page 139 for an example Page The following figure shows an example of the subscriber credit card information screen Field labels display in red are the required fields Figure 86 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page Preview Welcome Please choose from the following service selection 1 day 10 00 x How many units of Internet access would you like to purchase 1 Y Please kindly note that there will be no refund once connectivity is confirmed Please note that the time block of selected service is based on continuous usage Enter Payment Information all info is required Credit card number Credit card expiration date MMY Y Enter Email Address First Name z Last Name Fo 5 Address i e City EE State Province og ZIP Postal Code Country EE Phone EE Submit Tra
159. d console port speed The default setting is 9600 Note If you change the console port speed make sure you also make the same change to the terminal emulator software 217 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 73 SMT System Configuration continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Web Server Port Specify the port number of the embedded web server on the VSG to access the web configurator The default port number is 80 Enter a number between 8010 and 8060 to access the web configurator behind a NAT enabled network If you enter a number between 8010 and 8060 you need to append the port number to the WAN or LAN port IP address to access the web configurator For example if you enter 8010 as the web server port number then you must enter http www 192 168 1 1 8010 where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN or LAN port IP address E mail Server Redirect Enter the IP address or domain name of the e mail server to which the VSG forwards e mail This field should be configured if the e mail server is behind a firewall or on a NAT enabled network At the S ave and return R eturn without saving M odify prompt type S and press ENTER to save the changes and return to the previous screen type R and press ENTER to discard all changes and return to the previous screen or type M and press ENTER to continue configuring the fields Restart the device when prompted Press ESC an
160. d enter Y to stop any actions in the current screen and return to the previous screen All changes will be discarded 32 6 WAN Configuration From the main menu type 1 and press ENTER to display the System Configuration menu The WAN Configuration menu varies depending on the selection in the WAN Type field Refer to Chapter 6 on page 60 for background information 32 6 1 WAN Type Static Dynamic You can set the VSG to use a static fixed or dynamic IP address Figure 166 SMT WAN Configuration Static Dynamic WAN Configuration WAN Type D S P T S IP Address 192 169 1 1 Subnet Mask 1255 2554255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 254 Primary DNS Server 168 95 1 1 Secondary DNS Server Chapter 32 Using The SMT 218 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The follow table describes the fields in this menu Table 74 SMT WAN Configuration Static or Dynamic IP Address FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN Type D S Enter D Dynamic to set the VSG to dynamically obtain an IP address and other P T network information IP address DNS information etc from a DHCP server on the WAN network This is the default setting Enter S Static to set the VSG to use a static or fixed IP address Then set the following fields IP Address This field is available when you select S in the WAN Mode field Enter the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP or network administrator Subnet Mask This field is available when you
161. d label for the screen title Room No Specify the field label name to display the hotel room number Service Specify the field label name to display the service type For example Internet Access Unit Specify the field label name to display the number of time units purchased Price Specify the field label name to display the total price Purchase Time Select this checkbox to display this field and select the time and date format to display the purchase time Ending Select this checkbox to display this field and specify a closing sentence for the bill printout Preview Click this link to preview a bill printout in a new browser window Apply Click Apply to save the changes The following figure shows a bill printout example Figure 92 Customization Output Bill Example Unit 1 Date Internet Access Bill Room 1001 Service 1 day 35 Total 35 00 2006 6 16 15 57 21 Thank you very much 143 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 16 Bandwidth Management This chapter describes the bandwidth feature and shows you how to configure bandwidth control 16 1 Bandwidth Management Overview Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of outbound and inbound traffic on the LAN This helps reduce delays and dropped packets due to busy network traffic On the VSG outbound traffic refers to network traffic coming from a LAN port to
162. d the power cord 3 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the VSG These rubber feet help protect the VSG from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking 2 1 2 Rack Mount Installation The VSG can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your VSG on a standard EIA rack using the included rack mounting kit 1 Align one bracket with the holes on one side of the VSG and secure it with the bracket screws smaller than the rack mounting screws Similarly attach the other bracket Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 38 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 4 Rack Mount Attaching Brackets 4 2 After attaching both mounting brackets position the VSG in the rack by lining up the holes in the brackets with the appropriate holes on the rack Secure the VSG to the rack with rack mounting screws Figure 5 Rack Mount Securing to the Rack 5 OOD O 0O D BBBBBBBUS Ol 2 2 Hardware Connections The following sections describe the hardware connections of the VSG 2 2 1 Front Panel The console LAN and WAN ports the reset button and the LEDs are located on the front panel 39 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 6 Front Panel ZyXEL Vantage SG 1200 V2 Console Port PMS Port RESET Button LED LAN WAN 2 2 1 1 LAN Port
163. d turned on the VSG Refer to Chapter 2 on page 38 for more information 2 Configure the VSG for Internet access using the information provided by your ISP 3 Create a billing profile that charges 5 per hour of Internet access 4 Set the VSG to prompt for and checl customer account information 5 Create customer accounts on the VSG 6 Log in as a customer for connection test 4 2 Configure the VSG for Internet Access In this section you set the VSG to receive a dynamic WAN IP address from the ISP since the ISP does not provide you with a public IP address or Internet access account information Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example 50 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port on the VSG ZA aboutsblank Microsoft Internet Explorer Launch your web browser and enter 10 59 1 1 the default 55 e ts Tee Hsp Back m 9 A A Bsearch ara LAN management IP address on the VSG EE ooi Version 1 00 b4 2 A login screen displays Type admin default as the administrator user name and 1234 default as the password and click Get Started aia cons Password Get Started gt gt 3 In the web configurator WANILAN click System Setting gt TOS IP Address 10 59 1 1 WAN LAN E Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 4 Select Get automatically Defaut WAN MAC Address C Change to 00 po foo po o o tom y DE piis is Get automatically from a DHCP server WAN P
164. ddress Select this option to specify one IP address to belong to the private LAN Enter the IP address in field provided Add to List Click Add to List to insert the new setting in the table below Private LAN This table displays the IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses in the private LAN device List No This field displays the index number Active Select this option to set the selected entry to participate in the private LAN Private LAN This field displays one or a range of device IP addresses to belong in the private Device IP Address LAN List Delete Click Delete All to remove all accounts Click Delete to remove the selected account Apply Click Apply to save the changes 169 Chapter 23 Private LAN VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 24 Syslog This chapter shows you how to configure syslog logging 24 1 Syslog Overview Syslog logging allows the VSG to send logs to an external syslog server that is used to store and analyze logs 24 1 1 Syslog Server Setup Use the Syslog screen to configure to where the VSG is to send logs To configure the syslog settings click Advanced Logs to display the screen as shown next Figure 114 Logs Syslog Syslog Disable C Enable Server IP Address Server MAC Address Server 1 IP Address Server 2 IP Address F Syslog on LAN Syslog Server Syslog on WAN Disable C Enable IP Address or Domain Name SMTP Port 25 Email Server E mail SMT
165. dit Card Customization screen enter the message in the Credit Card Message field and click Apply to save the changes Figure 83 Credit Card Customization Standard Login Screen Message Standard Login P Customize the additional credit card message for the standard login page age Click here to b dit card Credit Card Message oe EO ME Ee Q Preview of Standard Login Page Click Preview of Standard Login Page to display a preview screen 135 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 84 Credit Card Customization Standard Login Screen Message Preview Welcome Username Password Please choose from the following service selection 1 day 10 00 v How many units of Internet access would you like to purchase 1 Y Please kindly note that there will be no refund once connectivity is confirmed Please note that the time block of selected service is based on continuous usage Please click ENTER to confirm your acceptance of the usage charge or CANCEL to exit The selected service charge will be posted directly into your guest folio Enter Cancel or click here to pay by credit card 15 6 2 Service Selection Page Specify the service selection and credit card messages to display on the subscriber login screen in the Credit Card Customization screen Chapter 15 Customization 136 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 85 Credit Card Customization Service Selection Page
166. dn ard dd dd 236 Figure 180 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 2 assasstesiaiq Eo FYHS SIR GES K dU Er cha d Sa bee GEBREKE 237 Figure 181 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 4 aisi erede erra deckt rh Ge Ge te GR ASK acra titre 238 Figure 182 Subscriber Login Screen Framed Example ius reeds eek AAR AE ee ke 240 Figure 183 Subscriber Login Information Window Example ee ee de ee ee ee 240 Figure 194 SP 200 Dally AGC esse RES epe rta RES SE RNEER ER rrr IS Eten 43 EE ee Ge Ge ed 247 Figure 195 SP 200 Monthly BESOEKE SN pad bua ER AA GE sensed GR N AG ER N AR See ei 248 Figure 186 SP 200 System SOME issie Ee SE ER ERGE EEUE GEREG ERG SG EEUE dS Ela Hd eek Ge 249 Figure 187 SP 200 N two rk StatislicS ie Et EE GER Aone EG Ge d Rd 250 Figure 188 WAN Port Cable Pin Assignments eds EENS EES nhu rane eB rer NG EE Ee 253 Figure 189 LAN Port Cable Pin ASSiGNMENES iss esia see EEN AGE KAR GES GEDINK Ge Ek AKA GR ON GE 253 Figure 190 DB25 Male to DB9 Male Connector susse eise Rek Ak AE Ee RA sesenta natia inna 254 Figure 191 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration iese ee ee ee ee AR ee ee 257 Figure 192 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address esse 258 Figure 193 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration 259 Figure 194 Windows XP Start MORA issues save Eseg peer NEED tana p ER Rae peek saa EER Ear IE we es 260 Figure 195 Windows XP Control Parel teer
167. dotted decimal notation For example 10 59 1 10 to 10 59 1 20 Apply Click Apply to save the changes 157 Chapter 19 Filter VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Privilege User This chapter shows how to set the VSG to allow computers with the specified IP addresses to access the Session List screen 20 1 Privilege User Setup The VSG allows specified computer s to access the Session List screen without having to log in first This allows administrators network operators or supervisors to view the current connection information on the VSG instantly without having to enter the user name and password and navigating to the screen Click Advanced Settings and Privilege User to display the configuration screen Figure 103 Privilege User C Disable Enable No 1 Start IP End IP Max 10 IPs GARAGES Privilege User for Session List Address List Delete 172 23 37 102 m The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 50 Privilege User FIELD DESCRIPTION Disable Select Disable to deactivate this feature You need to log into the web configurator first to view the Session List screen Enable Select Enable to allow the computer s with the specified IP address es to access the Session List screen without logging in Set the IP address es in the fields below Start IP Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation For example 10 59 1 10
168. dresses start with 1 1 0 in the first three leftmost bits Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting which is used to send information to groups of computers There is also a class E It is reserved for future use The following table shows the allowed ranges for the first octet of each class This range determines the number of subnets you can have in a network Table 101 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY SERE Oe OEEIRST Class A 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Class E 11110000 to 11111111 240 to 255 reserved 269 Appendix H IP Addresses and Subnetting P 660HW T v2 User s Guide Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 102 Natural Masks
169. dvanced and Frame To customize the subscriber login screen click Advanced Settings and Customization to display the screen as shown next Chapter 15 Customization 120 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 62 Customization Login Login Page c Standard Title Welcome Max 80 characters Footnote Please contact us if you have any ques Max 240 characters IV Copyright Copyright c 2001 2002 All Rights Res max 80 characters Background Color FFFFFF View Color Grid Standard Login Page Preview C Redirect Redirect Login Page URL Code C Advanced Welcome Slogan welcome Page Background FEN gt C Background Color FFFFFF View Color Grid Article Article Text Color 000000 View Color Grid Article Background Color re C FFFFFF View Color Grid Information Comments C Frame Top Frame URL Bottom Frame This frame will show the standard login page Service Selection customization Service Selection Message Please choose from the following service se Max 80 characters Purchase Unit Message How many units of Internet access would yo Max 80 characters Notification Message 1 Please kindly note that there will be no refur Max 180 characters Notification Message 2 Please note that the time block of selected Max 180 characters Notification Message 3 Max 160 characters Additional Remark Please click ENTER to confirm your accept ax 240 character 15 2 1 Standard Login Scre
170. e S2 B m Ed S1 i di V1 The following table shows the address mapping Table 14 NAT Example Many to One SUBSCRIBER ORIGINAL SOURCE IP TRANSLATED SOURCE IP S1 10 59 1 2 211 21 21 2 S2 10 59 1 3 211 21 21 2 8 2 3 Example 3 One to One and Many to One The figure below shows an example where subscriber S1 tires to connect to VPN server V1 while subscriber S2 and S3 try to connect to the same VPN server V2 at the same time In this case subscribers S1 and S2 map to the same WAN IP address since the destination is different while subscriber S3 maps to a different WAN IP address Figure 28 NAT Example One to One and Many to One S2 ma qa eee GE TT Internet e Re V1 ua S3 The following table shows the address mapping 77 Chapter 8 NAT Pool VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 15 NAT Example One to One and Many to One SUBSCRIBER ORIGINAL SOURCE IP TRANSLATED SOURCE IP S1 10 59 1 2 211 21 21 2 S2 10 59 1 3 211 21 21 2 S3 10 59 1 4 211 21 21 3 8 3 NAT Pool Setup Note You only need to set the NAT address pool if the remote VPN server s allows only one connection per source IP address You need to acquire additional public IP address es from your ISP to create NAT pool s To set the NAT address pool click System Settings and NAT Pool in the navigation panel A screen displays as shown next Figure 29 System Settings NAT Pool
171. e Usage time Bill Charge From gt created 173 Chapter 24 Syslog VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 56 Logs Log Format continued SYSLOG NAME FORMAT CREATED LAN Devices Id MAC Address LAN Devices Information Number of Each time interval Information devices Start Number End number Device name status specified between additional information 1 and 10080 minutes LAN Devices Id MAC Address LAN Device Alarm Device name FAIL When the VSG Alarm cannot connect to an attached LAN device Administrator Id MAC Address Administration Access Fail Fail Each time a access Fail message User IP Username system login Where attempt fails Fail message Bad Username Password Unauthorized IP Exceeded Maximum Login Note If Fail message Unauthorized IP and no user name can be obtained then Username None If Fail message Exceeded Maximum Login then Username Administrator Supervisor Accounting Operator NAT Pool Id MAC Address NAT Pool Exhausted Type When no IP Exhausted IP where address or port is Port N available for Type NAT pool IP address NAT Port number additional NAT mapping Chapter 24 Syslog 174 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 175 Chapter 24 Syslog VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 25 Session Trace This chapter shows you how to view subscriber session information on the VSG 25 1 Session Tra
172. e enter it in this field exactly as provided PPP MTU Setting Enter the size of a Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 221 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 76 SMT WAN Configuration PPTP continued FIELD DESCRIPTION TCP MSS Setting Enter the size of the Maximum Segment Size MSS At the S ave and return R eturn without saving M odify prompt type S and press ENTER to save the changes and return to the previous screen type R and press ENTER to discard all changes and return to the previous screen or type M and press ENTER to continue configuring the fields Restart the device when prompted Press ESC and enter Y to stop any actions in the current screen and return to the previous screen All changes will be discarded 32 7 LAN Configuration From the Main Menu screen enter 3 to display the LAN Configuration menu as shown next Refer to Chapter 6 on page 60 for background information Figure 169 SMT LAN Configuration Lease Time LAN Configuration DHCP Configuration DHCP Service Start IP Address Private 10 59 1 2 DHCP Pool Size Private 20 D R S S Private 1440 Primary DNS IP Address 168 95 1 1 Secondary DNS IP Address The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 77 SMT LAN Configuration FIELD DESCRIPTION DHCP Service D R S Enter D Disable to deactivate DHCP se
173. e 143 Firmware Manual Upgrade Manual Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the firmware click Browse to locate the firmware file and click Apply or use remote TFTP server Local PC File Path Browse TFTP Server IP Address Binary File Name Apply Chapter 30 Firmware 202 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 4 Specify the firmware file name in the Local PC File Path field or click Browse to locate it 5 Click Apply to start the file transfer process 6 When the file transfer is completed successfully the following message displays and the VSG automatically restarts to complete the firmware upgrade process Figure 144 Web Configurator Firmware Upgrade Successful This System is rebooting Please wait for 30 seconds 7 After the VSG finishes restarting access the web configurator again Check the firmware version number in the System Status screen 30 2 1 Manual Firmware Upgrade via a TFTP Server Follow the steps below to upload the firmware using the web configurator 1 Download the latest firmware from www zyxel com and store it ina TFTP server Unzip the file if it is zipped 2 Run a TFTP server program and specify the location of the firmware file and the communication mode Refer to the documentation that comes with your TFTP server program for instructions 3 Access the web configurator Refer to the section on accessing the web configurator for instructions 4 Click System Tools Firmware a
174. e File Path field or click Browse 3 Click Apply to start the configuration restore process The VSG automatically restarts after the restoration process is complete 29 3 1 Restore Configuration Using TFTP This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration 199 Chapter 29 Configuration VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Note This function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk 1 Click System Tools and Configuration A screen displays as shown next Figure 140 Configuration Restore TFTP Configuration This feature can import your saved settings to this device or export the stored settings from this device to your PC Backup Click Backup to save current system configuration from this device to your computer or to the remote TFTP server TFTP Server IP Address Text File Name Apply Restore To restore your stored system configuration to this device File Path EE Ee Ee Browse Apply TFTP Server IP Address m s Text File Name i Apply Reset the system back to factory defaults Keep subscriber profile Keep port location mapping profile Apply 2 In the Restore section Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in dotted decimal notation in the TFTP Server IP Address field 3 Specify a file name for the configuration backup in the Text
175. e Remote Management Example 2 E Web Server osse internet IP 10 59 1 10 VSG w MAC 00 50 BA 6D 22 96 Server Port 80 In the LAN Device Management screen you map virtual port 60001 to the server port 80 on the web server Figure 109 LAN Devices Example 2 LAN Devices Accommodate up to 300 entries Polling Interval 1 Min s No Douce Name Virtual Port Device Device Device Anplication 60001 60300 IP Address Server Port MAC Address PP 1 web server e070 10 59 1 10 80 posoBAeD2296 TCP v 2 ae p AE IE iuL pe To access an inside server on the LAN enter the WAN IP address of your VSG and the virtual port number of the inside server separated by a colon In this example to access the web server enter http 192 168 1 1 9602 where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN IP address of the VSG You can also access the server by entering the domain name provided that you specified a DNS server on the VSG Enter the domain name and the virtual port number separated by a colon for example http www domainName 60001 You can also access the LAN devices through the VSG web configurator refer to Section 28 7 1 on page 190 for more information 163 Chapter 21 LAN Devices VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes to specified destinations 22 1 Static Route Overview Static routes tell the VSG routing information that it cannot learn automaticall
176. e User Static Routing Table 5 LAN Devices Static Route Private LAN _ Logs Session Trace E snme Miscellanea Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 44 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 3 4 1 Saving Configuration Changes In a configuration screen you must click Apply to save the changes A Success screen displays when the configuration settings are saved to the VSG Click back to return to the previous screen Figure 13 Apply Success Success The Configuration has been changed _ For specific settings such as the device IP address subscriber authentication method etc you will be prompted to restart the VSG after you click Apply in the configuration screen A Restart screen displays Click Apply again to restart the VSG and make the changes take effect Figure 14 Apply Restart Restart To Restart the system click Apply 3 5 System Login Accounts There are four system accounts that you can use to log in to the VSG administrator account manager supervisor and super subscriber The administrator account allows you full access to all system configurations The default administrator user name is admin and password 1234 The account manager account is used for subscriber account management only No system configuration is allowed This account is useful for front desk personnel such as in a hotel for setting up subscriber accounts wit
177. e remote VPN device the VSG maps each private LAN IP address to one public WAN IP address One to Many For VPN connections to different remote VPN devices the VSG maps multiple private LAN IP address to one public WAN IP address 8 2 NAT Examples The following sections describe some NAT address mapping examples for VPN connections 8 2 1 Example 1 One to One The figure below shows an example where the two subscribers S1 and S2 tries to establish secure VPN connections to the same VPN server V1 at the same time For example the VSG is using a public IP address of 21 1 21 21 1 In this case the VSG performs One to One IP address translation on the WAN Figure 26 NAT Example One to One S2 E V2 SEIN em O Z NA v1 The following table shows the address mapping Table 13 NAT Example One to One SUBSCRIBER ORIGINAL SOURCE IP TRANSLATED SOURCE IP S1 10 59 1 2 211 21 21 2 S2 10 59 1 3 221 21 21 3 1 All public IP address discussed are for examples only Chapter 8 NAT Pool 76 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 8 2 2 Example 2 Many to One The figure below shows an example where the two subscribers S1 and S2 try to establish a secure VPN connection to VPN servers V1 and V2 respectively at the same time In this case the VSG performs Many to One IP address translation on the WAN since the destination address is different Figure 27 NAT Example Many to On
178. e subscriber access to the Internet However with walled garden you can define the web site address es which all users can access without logging in 149 Chapter 17 Portal Page Advertisement Link and Walled Garden VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Note A walled garden web site may not display properly or even be accessible if the domain name contains multiple IP addresses Click Advanced and then Walled Garden to display the screen as shown Figure 98 Walled Garden Walled Garden Name Link 1 URL l Name Link 2 URL Name Link 3 URL Name Link 4 URL Name Link 5 URL Name Link 6 URL Name Link 7 URL Name Link 8 URL Name Link 9 URL Name Link 10 URL The following table describes the labels to configure the walled garden feature Table 46 Walled Garden LABEL DESCRIPTION Link 1 10 In the Name field enter a descriptive name up to 80 characters for the walled garden link to be displayed in the web browser In the URL field enter the web site address up to 200 characters of the web site Apply Click Apply to save the changes The following figure shows a subscriber login screen example with walled garden links Chapter 17 Portal Page Advertisement Link and Walled Garden 150 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 99 Subscriber Login Screen with Walled Garden Links Example S http 172 21 3 66 web
179. e using an external RADIUS server or the built in accounting feature Local Content and Advertising Links Once connected to the network the VSG can redirect the subscriber to a specified web site and display advertising links This can be a source of extra online advertising revenues and increased business exposure Access Control Walled Garden With the walled garden feature subscribers are able to access predetermined web sites without logging in The VSG blocks full Internet access until the subscribers log in E mail Forwarding The VSG is able to forward and retrieve e mail messages when the subscriber s default e mail server is down or behind a firewall DNS Proxy With DNS proxy the VSG provides DNS redirection when a subscriber s configured DNS server is behind a firewall or located in a private Intranet NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network The VSG automatically performs NAT on the LAN You can also set the VSG to perform NAT on the WAN for VPN IPSec and PPTP connections Static Route Static routes tell the VSG how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually and disable NAT Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG 34 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Subscriber Login Page Customization
180. ectivity is confirmed passwords Subscribers can Please note that the time block of selected service is based on continuous usage purchase additional time blocks with different billing plans Please click ENTER to confirm your acceptance of the usage charge or CANCEL to exit The You can still create static or selected service charge will be posted directly into your guest folio dynamic accounts However subscribers using the dynamic or Enter Cancel static accounts are prompted for usernames and passwords Scenario B Select this option if you want to use Figure 35 Subscriber Login Scenario B PMS billing without port location Welcame mapping You must then create the subscriber accounts Subscribers are prompted for their usernames Username and passwords before Internet Password access is allowed Subscribers can purchase EED additional time blocks with different Please choose from the following service selection ay billing plans How many units of Internet access would you like to purchase 7 Please kindly note that there will be no refund once connectivity is confirmed Please note that the time block of selected service is based on continuous usage Please click ENTER to confirm your acceptance of the usage charge or CANCEL to exit The selected service charge will be posted directly into your guest folio Enter Cancel Scenario C Select this option to use the VSG s Figure 36 Subscriber Login Scenario C built in or
181. ecure connection Follow the steps below to view and install the default SSL security certificate on a computer 1 Access the VSG A Security Alert window displays Click OK to continue and close the window Figure 152 Installing the SSL Security Certificate First Security Alert xi i You are about to view s over a secure connection Al Any information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed by anyone else on the Web In the future do not show this warning More Info 2 A second Security Alert window displays Chapter 31 SSL Certificate 208 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 153 Installing the SSL Security Certificate Second Security Alert seeuiynet EE Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate N The security certificate was issued by a company vou have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid N The name on the security certificate does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes i M i View Certificate 3 Click View Certificate to display the Certificate window as shown Notice the warning about the untrusted certificate Figure 154 Installing the SSL Security Certificate View Certificate certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate
182. ed Are you sure Y N Chapter 32 Using The SMT 228 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 229 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 33 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies After each problem description some instructions are provided to help you to diagnose and to solve the problem 33 1 Using the LEDs to Diagnose Problems The LEDs are useful aides for finding possible problem causes 33 1 1 The Power LED The LED on the front panel does not light up Table 79 Troubleshooting the Power LED STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check the connections from the VSG to the power source Make sure you are using the supplied power cord and proper power supply Refer to the appendix on product specifications Make sure the power source is turned on and that the VSG is receiving sufficient power If these steps fail to correct the problem contact your local distributor for assistance 33 1 2 The LAN Port LEDs None of the LEDs for the LAN port s light up when connected to an Ethernet device Table 80 Troubleshooting the LAN LED STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure you are using the correct Ethernet cable Connect the LAN port to a hub switch using a crossover Ethernet cable or directly to a computer using a straight through Ethernet cable Verify that the attached device s is turned on and properly connected to the VSG
183. ed to Ensures the identity of a remote computer Issued to www localhost com Issued by www localhost com valid from 11 5 2002 to 11 2 2012 10Click OK in the Certificate window to retum to the Security Alert window as shown Notice that the first item in the list changed to inform you that the certificate is from a trusted host Click Yes to proceed to the login screen in secure mode Figure 161 Security Alert Trusted seewrtynet x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate o The security certificate is from a trusted certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Note Once you are logged in with SSL security the URL starts with https instead of http Chapter 31 SSL Certificate 212 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 213 Chapter 31 SSL Certificate VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 32 Using The SMT This chapter introduces the SMT System Management Terminal and shows you how to use the SMT to configure the VSG 32 1 About the SMT The System Management Terminal SMT is a menu driven interface that you use to configure the VSG Access the SMT using the console port Note You can connect the CONSOLE port on the VSG directly to a computer serial port or to a statement
184. een Table 28 Dynamic Account List LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click Refresh to update this screen Backup Click Backup to backup the account information to a computer Refer to Section 12 4 1 on page 109 Print List Click Print List to print all account information to the local printer connected to the computer that you use to configure the VSG Note This does NOT display a printout preview window S N This field displays the serial number or the Index number of a dynamic account Username This field displays the account user name Click the heading to sort the entries in ascending or descending order based on this column Password This field displays the account password Billing Profile This field displays the index number and the name of a billing profile the account is using Time Created This field displays the time the account is created First Login This field displays the time a subscriber logs in using the account Expiration When an account is currently in use this field displays the time before which a subscriber can still use the account to access the Internet When an account is never used this field displays the time the account becomes invalid Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts 108 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 28 Dynamic Account List continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays In Use when the account is currently in
185. eld displays the end of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool Private Lease Time This field is visible when the DHCP Status is Server Private This field displays the time in minutes a DHCP client is allowed to use an assigned IP address E mail Server IP The field displays the IP address or the domain name of the e mail server Address SSL Certificate Country This field displays the two letter abbreviation of your country State This field displays the name of the state or province where your organization is located Local City This field displays the name of the city your organization is located Organization This field displays the name of your organization Origination This field displays additional information about your organization Unit Common This field displays the fully qualified domain name of your web server Name Email Address This field displays your e mail address 28 3 Current User List The Current User List screen displays a list of subscribers currently logged on to the VSG for Internet access Click System Status and Current User List to display the screen as shown Click a column heading to sort the entries if applicable Note The fields displayed in the Current User List screen vary depending on the subscriber account type or authentication method Figure 123 System Status Current User List refresh 1 Static Cindy HIGO fix Page No Type Username Billing
186. em Tools Restart and click Apply 47 Chapter 3 The Web Configurator VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 16 System Tools Restart Restart To Restart the system click Apply 3 9 Logging Out of the Web Configurator In the Main Menu screen click System Tools Logout and click Apply to exit from the web configurator Figure 17 System Tools Logout Logout To Log out of the web configurator click Apply Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 48 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 49 Chapter 3 The Web Configurator VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 4 Initial Setup Example This chapter shows you how to configure the VSG for Internet access and user login 4 1 Overview As an Internet cafe owner you want to set up the VSG in the store and provide Internet service to customers You have already signed up for Internet access from your local ISP and a DSL modem is installed for Internet connection In store Internet access is provided with a fee You want to charge 5 per hour for Internet access and allow customers to purchase up to 15 hours at a time You create 10 customer accounts and store them on the VSG which checks the account information before Internet access is allowed Figure 18 Initial Setup Network Example E Modem NNNM N LAN CAEN sel WAN C Nes The following outlines the configuration steps 1 You should have already made the hardware connections an
187. em setings WAN LAN PPPOE ses br pe EREGAS ERG REEF GE Ke 65 Table 9 System settings WANILAN PPTP 425 atr kis ds Rood geer pdt Fade Gees gie 67 Table 10 System Settings Server asie KA AG Ge ERA Ee cin denn Fe ti E i d 71 Table 11 QW T 74 Table 12 WAN NAT Mapping Types for VPN esse se se se Re ee ee ee ee ee ee ee nennen 76 Table T3 MAT Example Quie lo Te ii EE GERED ES BEER EE SR Ge Ke ie 76 Table 14 NAT Example Many to Onne uas sukses ENE ttn teer tat FREE GEES aaro dama GAS Ee BEE ENE Ge 77 Table 15 NAT Example One to One and Many to One ie ee ee ee ee ee ee 78 Table 10 System S tings NAT Pool ooo 78 Tabla 17 System Settings Authentication ise oer prede e o a ned dada ads 84 Table 18 System Authentication Scenario Guide ie ee ee ee ER ER RA Ee ee ee 87 Table 19 System Setting Billing Billing Profile eene 89 Table 20 System Settings Billing Billing Profile Setting eseeeessssse 90 Table 21 System Setting Billing PMS Configuration esee 92 Table 22 Static Account Settings Global Settings ecce 95 Table 23 Create Static Subscriber Account Generate Automatically 96 Table 24 Create Static Subscriber Account Manual sees sesse ke ee ee RA ee AE RA AE ee 97 Table 2 Stie ACCGODUHE DDOEIUE sisie EG EE dE DE De eke LEE Ld opt dn 100 Table 20 Static
188. en The standard subscriber login screen is the VSG s pre configured default simple login screen You can modify the screen color and title and add copyright information and a footnote In the Login Screen Configuration screen select Standard 121 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 63 Customization Login Standard amp Standard Title Welcome aam 80 character Footnote Please contact us if you have any ques ma M Copyright Copyright c 2001 2002 All Rights Res cm Background Color FFFFFF View Color Grid Standard Login Page Preview The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 31 Customization Login Standard LABEL DESCRIPTION Standard Select this option to use the standard subscriber login screen Title Enter the login page title up to 80 characters in the field provided Footnote Select this check box and enter up to 240 characters in the field provided to add the footnote to the login screen Copyright Select this check box and enter the copyright information up to 80 characters in the field provided to add copyright information to the login screen Background Color Specify the color of the registration text For example enter 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values The default is black 000000 Standard Login Page Save the se
189. ence Enter a description to identify the service For example Internet Proprietary Select this option if you are using a proprietary PMS system Speed of PMS Set the fields below to configure the PMS port settings on the VSG Interface Note Make sure the port settings are the same on the VSG and the connected PMS device Bits per second Select the speed of the PMS port connection The default is 9600 Data bits Specify the data bits Parity Specify the parity Stop bits Specify the data stop bits Apply Click Apply to save the changes 10 3 Types of Subscriber Accounts After you have set up the subscriber authentication methods and billing profile s you need to create subscriber accounts There are two types of subscriber accounts static and dynamic For static accounts refer to Chapter 11 on page 94 For dynamic accounts refer to Chapter 12 on page 104 93 Chapter 10 Billing VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Static Subscriber Accounts This chapter shows you how to set up and manage static subscriber accounts 11 1 Static Subscriber Account Overview Static accounts are useful in locations such as hotels where you can match an account user name to a fixed location for easy management Once a static subscriber account is created it stays permanently in the VSG unless deleted manually You can generate static accounts automatically or manually The following figure shows
190. ent 56 pool size 234 DHCP client table 187 update interval 187 DHCP pool size 222 DHCP relay 223 DHCP server 56 222 236 DHCP services 222 digital certificate 206 digital signature 206 dimension 235 disclaimer 2 display subscriber account 102 DNS 258 DNS proxy 34 DNS server 219 223 document feedback 30 domain name 56 217 223 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP dynamic IP address 219 dynamic subscriber account 104 backup 109 configuration 105 create using statement printer 107 create using web configurator 106 display 108 general settings 104 method to create 104 print 108 E edit a subscriber account 100 edit billing profiles 89 EIA standard size rack 38 e mail forwarding 34 e mail server redirect 218 equal share bandwidth allocation 144 configure 145 error messages 244 Ethernet cable 230 length specifications 252 types 252 Ethernet port 252 speed 252 export billing logs 191 F FCC interference statement 3 feature 32 277 Index VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide feedback 30 firmware download to TFTP server 204 firmware download 202 firmware upgrade 35 about subscriber connection 204 automatic 204 from a TFTP Server 203 from computer 202 from TFTP server 225 important note on SMT 225 manual 202 schedule frequency 205 scheduled 204 firmware version 185 249 forward e mails 34 G Gateway 165 general setup 56 generate static subscriber accounts automat
191. entication Scenario Guide eise ee de ee ee ER ee 86 Figure 34 Subscriber Login Scenario A uses see ek AAR ERA AAR Ee RA isse Ee RA AA AE Re RA AE ee Ai 87 Figure 35 Subscriber Login Scenario B issue sriswEE GEREG NE GERS esee scc ke mass cuh deben Sue DE KERSE Ee DOE IG 87 Figure 36 Subscriber Login SOSFIBEIO C ike E RNEER e ERE X SEE PEE LIRE FS Ee ed 87 Figure 37 System Setting Billing Billing Profle iste d aar rante EER GAS eh EET SG EE Ek 88 Figure 38 System Settings Billing Billing Profile Setting eee 89 List of Figures 20 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 System Setting Billing PMS Configuration eeeeese 92 ESTEE steeds ioo ta hid dti Pod Ca Eo paa n CER OE EE EI Ed 94 Static Account Settings Global Settings Ee EE RE EE EE GEE EER EN EE EE Pi 94 System Settings Create Static Subscriber Account ies ee ee ee ee ee n 95 Create Static Subscriber Account Generate Automatically
192. ernet Access for LAN Networks es ee ee ee emen 35 1 3 2 Internet Access in Public Areas es ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ke 36 1 3 2 Hotel Apolicaton WIA PMS sca spice ope SE dics ivo SS EG N Ee ON Es Ge ee eN ee 36 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection sees seek ee KERE RE nennen nnn nnns 38 RE AA ODIOS RS RE EO m 38 ZA Deskop InstallaliGB EE EE EN 38 221 2 Rack Mount Ipnstallallghl 15 2 2 2 2 opea eri e noeud a eoe Li ee ee dE i DE e 38 2 2 Hardware Con SE niet tede E aee i ERE Mate 39 POMPA ISI El MT TTE TE 39 22 EREGAS 40 P LS WAN FON su 9 N OE RM EHE MISES 40 21 LONSOB BUE ioi on e i ER e Sas ue b aei ai eek EE 40 po qu PNG FPO ene eee ore TR LM Pr M LL M Es 40 VECES II IMMER mM 40 22 2 Fot Pas RE C ss SEE SE N RE N AE GR GE ee ge eo 41 2s mes Pull n GE EE EG N GE EG OE EE A GE ADM CE 41 Table of Contents 10 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide KR PORN GU EHS EE EE ER RE EE 41 Chapter 3 Bi es v PIN 42 3 1 introducing the Web Configurator iS EERS OGE EE estare rina ror De GR 42 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator ss REEKSE EE uL EE Ge GEN GEE Ee cuiua 42 29 cU Gids RE OE EE E ES 43 23 1 dh Novigadoi FANG AO EE EO 44 28 cpm Speo LINKS ss oes i td e abr pt td per 44 34 Sr DEP n RR rrr e err mne Te UOrCT mre ect ny reer renee SCOTT meee ar Tr 44 44 1 Saving Configuration Changes sicssscisosseccrsiwsectncsstescnnestscieeaivessreenvd 45 diy stem LUS AGRI ses
193. ervice selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber s site By implementing PPPOE directly on the VSG rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPOE software installed since the VSG does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have Internet access Figure 23 System Settings WAN LAN PPPoE WANILAN LAN IP Address 10 58 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default C Changeto 00 00 00 j00 j00 00 C Get automatically from a DHCP server WAN MAC Address C Use fixed IP address PPPoE Mostly for ADSL modem users Username Password WAN Port Mode PPP MTU Setting 1492 option TCP MSS Setting 1452 option Service Name option Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 10 Min C Keep alive Redial Period 30 Sec C PPTP Mostly for Europe ADSL modem users The following table describes the related fields in this screen Table8 System Settings WAN LAN PPPoE FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN Port Mode PPPOE Select this option to activate PPPOE support 65 Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table8 System Settings WAN LAN PPPOE continued
194. es General Authentication Advanced Connect using l B Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items v E Client for Microsoft Networks v ID File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks vi Z QoS Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP e Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically 261 Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Ifyou have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced Figure 198 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Settings Advanced TCP IP Settings CIP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 6 If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses Inthe IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add
195. esponding hexadecimal values Agree Button Enter the label name for the button the subscribers click to accept the service usage agreement before they can access the Internet Disagree Button Enter the label name for the button the subscribers click to decline the service usage agreement They will not be able to access the Internet Chapter 15 Customization 134 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 38 Customization Account Printout continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Standard User Click this link to preview the standard user agreement screen in a new browser Agreement window Preview Apply Click Apply to save the changes The following figure shows a user agreement page example Figure 82 Customization Account Printout Preview User Agreement Page Article text Regular User VPN User Agree Do not agree 15 6 Credit Card After you have entered your Authorize net account information in the Credit Card screen you may customize the credit card information screen the subscribers use Click Advanced Customization and click the Credit Card link to display the Credit Card Customization screen Configure the fields in this screen and click Apply to save the changes 15 6 1 Standard Login Page If you use the standard subscriber login screen you can specify a message to re direct credit card paying subscribers to the credit card information screen In the Cre
196. ess of the client computer The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal characters A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hard wired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the client computer 28 5 Session List To display a list session information click System Status and Session List The Session List screen displays up to 2048 entries When all rows are used the entries wrap around and the old entries are erased This screen automatically updates every 5 seconds Figure 125 System Status Session List Session List List of sessions of Network events and records or the newest 16384 incoming and outgoing packet information including source IP address destination IP address and port number No TCP UDP IP Client Port Client Port Fake IP Remote Port Remote Idle 1 TCP 10 59 1 2 1353 42005 203 160 232 7 80 25 2 TCP 10 59 1 2 1354 42006 203 160 232 7 80 25 GO fix Page M First 4 Previous Next gt End MI The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 System Status Session List LABEL DESCRIPTION No This field displays the index number of an entry TCP UDP This field displays the type of traffic TCP or UD
197. ethod Refer to Section 9 1 4 on page 81 for more information Select Expired when and specify the time from the drop down list box es for the accumulate billing method The subscriber accounts will be invalid once the allocated time period is used up This option is only available when you select the Day Week or Month option in the Period Time field Selective Specify the range of time units between 1 and 99 a subscriber is allowed to Unit purchase at any one time Bandwidth Limit Refer to Chapter 16 on page 144 Set the fields below to configure the bandwidth limit for this billing profile Uplink Bandwidth Limitation drop down list box in the field provided Downlink Bandwidth Limitation drop down list box in the field provided Chapter 10 Billing The range is presented as a drop down list box in the information pop up window Note You must activate bandwidth management to use this feature To use a pre defined option select the first option and choose a bandwidth from the To manually set the bandwidth select the second option and specify the bandwidth To use a pre defined option select the first option and choose a bandwidth from the To manually set the bandwidth select the second option and specify the bandwidth VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 20 System Settings Billing Billing Profile Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Type Select Private Service to
198. etting Dynamic Account Operator Dynamic Account List 12 2 Dynamic Account General Settings There are two ways you can create dynamic accounts on the VSG using a statement printer connected to the VSG using the web configurator Before you create dynamic accounts you must specify the billing profile s the number of printout copies and the number of hours before the VSG automatically deletes an inactive account Refer to the related sections for more information For creating dynamic accounts using a statement printer make sure you connect the statement printer sold separately to the CONSOLE port on the VSG Then in the Dynamic Account Setting screen select the profile setting for each button on the statement printer refer to the user s guide that comes with the statement printer Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts 104 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide For web based dynamic account generation you can specify up to four billing profiles one for each of the four buttons you click to generate the accounts automatically on the web based screen Click System Settings Accounting and click the Dynamic Account Setting link to display the screen as shown next Figure 53 Accounting Dynamic Account Setting Dynamic Account Setting Dynamic Accounts can be created automatically when you click the button from the Web based Account Operator or the Statement Printer Web based Statement Panel Settings No Butto
199. ew or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel co
200. file setting Built in authentication This allows every user to have a different service quality for Internet bandwidth 16 2 1 Equal Bandwidth Setup To configure the VSG to impose the same bandwidth limits on all subscribers select Equal bandwidth for all subscribers in the Bandwidth Management screen and set the related fields Figure 94 Bandwidth Management Equal Share Bandwidth Management Bandwidth Management c Equal bandwidth for all subscribers The function enables administrator to limit bandwidth usage on a per user basis MAC address That prevents users from consuming a disproportionately large amount of bandwidth so every user gets a fair share of the available bandwidth Maximum Upstream Bandwidth 256Kbps C 10 Kbps 64 24576 Maximum Downstream Bandwidth 256Kbps 7 C 10 Kbps 64 24576 X M C Class of service based on RADIUS or billing profile settings The function enables administrator to limit bandwidth usage according to the RADIUS vendor specific attribute RADIUS authentication or billing profile setting Built in authentication This allows every user to have a different service quality for Internet bandwidth The following table describes the related labels in this screen 145 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 43 Bandwidth Management Equal Share LABEL DESCRIPTION Maximum Upstream Bandwidth To use a pre def
201. free Internet access in the VIP room or for sponsors in events Chapter 18 Passthrough 152 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 100 Passthrough Subscriber IP and MAC Address No Subscriber IP amp MAC Address Passthrough IP Address No IP Address No IP Address EI 13 EI 25 EI EEN 14 REEN 26 15 C 27 OE F 16 EET 28 3 fr 17 EE 29 18 30 FEE EG 19 31 E T EG 20 ooo 32 Tid 21 oor 33 7 o 22 34 EI LI 23 35 e E 24 36 LT MAC Address No MAC Address No MAC Address m 11 EG 21 C J iS 12 EE 2 EE ET 13 ss 23 EI 1 14 LI 24 1 EEN 15 EE 25 EI LI 16 EE 26 ENG 17 27 dl 1 18 3 28 L 19 TT 29 i 20 id 30 1 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 47 Passthrough Subscriber IP and MAC Address FIELD DESCRIPTION Subscriber IP amp MAC Address Passthrough No This read only field displays the index number of an entry IP Address Enter the IP address of a computer in dotted decimal notation whose packets are allowed to pass through the VSG For example 10 59 1 10 MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer in 6 hexadecimal pairs separated by a hyphen for example 00 50 BA 8D 22 96 whose packets are allowed to pass through the VSG 153 Chapter 18 Passthrough VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 18 2 1 Destination URL and IP Address Passthrough
202. g Profile Standard Random Password Length 6 7 Nate For PMS billing type use only numbers for subscriber accounts Prefix From Postfix To Static Accounts backup and restore This feature can backup the account information to your computer or restore a previously saved account information file to your system t Password Length field to have the VSG generate a 6 character password for each account 6 Click Apply to generate the accounts Click back 7 To view the list of accounts created click the Static Account List link You should see the new accounts and the generated passwords Static Account refresh No Username Password Billing Profile eee 1 VIP1 gw857ip4 2 Standard 0 2 VIP1O dvjdagz7w 2 Standard 0 3 VIP2 mmnav7e 2 Standard 0 4 VIP3 aebty95v 2 Standard 0 5 VIP4 nsg x77j 2 Standard 0 B VIPS ksxmcd7v 2 Standard 0 7 VIP amp b5tw4277 2 Standard 0 8 VIP7 Syzbuy7e 2 Standard 0 9 VIPS bhgn887b 2 Standard 0 10 VIPS qk96xt62 2 Standard 0 HIGO hs Page Backup Print List First Login Expiration Status Delete Offline Oo Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline aaaaaaaaa End MI W First 4 Previous Nex 4 6 Customer Login Test In this section you log into the VSG as a customer and test the Internet connection 53 Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 1 From the Static Ac
203. g the SP 200 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 93 SP 200 System Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP This field displays the DHCP mode DHCP Server Relay or DHCP Disable on the LAN DHSP If the DHCP field is DHCP Server this field displays the first of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool If the DHCP field is DHCP Relay this field displays the DHCP server IP address DHEP This field is visible when the DHCP is DHCP Server This field displays the end of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool DHLT This field is visible when the DHCP is DHCP Server This field displays the time in minutes a DHCP client is allowed to use an assigned IP address EMAIL The field displays e mail server port number Network Statistics This report shows the network statistics on the VSG Key combination ABCAB The following figure shows an example Figure 187 SP 200 Network Statistics Network WAST ESTABLISHED SYST 02D 02H 42M 46S WATD 37 WARD 4816 WATE 0 WARE 0 LATD 1768 LARD 4616 ATE 0 ARE 0 2004 10 28 15 24 42 End The following table describes the labels in this report Appendix E Report Printing Using the SP 200 250 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 94 SP 200 Network Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION WAST This field displays the WAN connection status SYST
204. g values 1 WAN IP address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 2 LAN IP address of 10 59 1 1 3 DHCP server enabled on the LAN with a 252 client IP address pool starting from 10 59 1 2 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If you wish to change the factory defaults or to learn more about TCP IP please read on 6 2 LANs and WANs A LAN Local Area Network is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building A WAN Wide Area Network on the other hand is an outside connection to another network or the Internet 6 3 IP Address Assignment A static IP 1s a fixed IP that you configure on the VSG A dynamic IP is not fixed the DHCP server provides an IP address to the VSG each time it connects to the network When an Ethernet device is configured to obtain a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server it is known as a DHCP client 6 3 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask Like houses on a street that share a common street name the computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup 60 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved a block of addresses
205. grade 202 mapping profiles to buttons on the statement printer 104 Maximum Segment Size MSS 222 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 221 merchant password 118 MIB 179 monthly account summary 247 N NAT 34 74 160 Definitions 74 How it works 75 on LAN 160 What it does 75 What NAT does 75 NAT address pool 78 NAT examples 76 NAT Mapping Types 76 NAT Pool 78 NAT enabled device 160 navigation panel 43 Network Address Translation See NAT network application 35 hotel with PMS 36 Internet access 35 network cable 252 Network Management System NMS 179 network statistics 250 NMS 179 180 O online glossary 30 P passthrough 152 destination URL or IP 154 subscriber computer IP or MAC 152 types 152 pin assignment 252 pin assignments 252 PMS 40 88 91 Based on Room 91 Based on Subscriber 91 charge modes 91 connection speed 93 port location mapping 91 type of 92 PMS billing 88 service selection messages 125 PMS port connector 40 PMS port settings 93 PMS setup 92 PMS transaction 193 PMS transaction messages 193 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet See PPPoE Point to Point Tunneling Protocol See PPTP Port Identifier 113 port mapping 161 application type 161 port number 161 portal page 148 portal web site 148 Port Location Mapping 92 112 backup 114 configuring 112 create mapping 113 114 restore 114 power connection 41 power specification 235 PPPoE 33 219 connect on demand 220 idle timeout 220
206. guration DHCP Service This field displays the DHCP mode Server Relay or Disable on the LAN port D R S Start IP Address This field is visible when the DHCP Service field is Server This field displays the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool DHCP Pool Size This field is visible when the DHCP Service field is Server This field displays the size of the DHCP client pool Lease Time This field is visible when the DHCP Service field is Server This field displays for how many minutes a DHCP client is allowed to use an assigned IP address Agent Server IP This field is visible when the DHCP Service field displays Relay Address This field displays the IP address of the DHCP relay agent Primary These fields are visible when the DHCP Service field is Server CE DNS IP These two fields display the IP address es of the DNS server s ress Press any key at the Press any to return prompt to go back to the previous screen 32 9 System Utilities Use the System Utilities menus to upgrade firmware on the VSG or change the administrator login password Chapter 32 Using The SMT 224 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide In the SMT main menu type 5 and press ENTER to display the Utilities Menu screen To return to the Main Menu screen press 3 Figure 171 SMT Utilities Menu Utilities Menu 1 Firmware Upgrade 2 Change Password 3 Return to Main Menu Enter selection
207. h Management on page 144 for more information Note You must also specify the BW Down attribute Integer 64 24567 BW Down This attribute defines the download bandwidth allowed for a subscriber Internet access is based on the download bandwidth regardless of the account expiration time This means that a subscriber is allowed to access the Internet until the total download bandwidth allocated is reached This attribute is supported when you enable bandwidth management on the VSG with the class of service based on the RADIUS settings Refer to Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management on page 144 for more information Note You must also specify the BW Up attribute Integer 64 24567 Portable Page URL This attribute allows you to specify a different advertising web site for each subscriber after a successful login String maximum 200 243 Appendix D Vendor Specific Attributes VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Error Messages The following table describes the VSA related error messages Table 91 VSA related Error Messages ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION VSA Time Error Traffic limit to finish is selected The VSG is set to use the Time to Finish mode while the VSA response from the external RADIUS server include the Traffic limit attribute VSA Over Error Traffic limit value The value for Traffic limit attribute is more than the maximum allowed 409
208. harge Check Time Selective Unit From 1 ol 0 Period Time finish minute TE fo From 1 ey hour 0 Period Time finish To 10 From 1 Period Time finish e day foo Tofo C Expire when 00 00 7 From 1 Period Time finish ec week D Tofo C Expire when Sun 00 00 From 1 Period Time finish c month 0 Tofo C Expire when 01 00 00 89 Chapter 10 Billing VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Bandwidth Limit Service Type Tojo ofl month C Expire when 01 00 00 0 Note You must activate the bandwidth management feature and select a class of service 64Kbps Hop Kbps 64 24576 256 Kbps yj C 0 Kbps 64 24576 C Unlimited Maximum Upstream Bandwidth Maximum Downstream Bandwidth Private Service C Public Service The following table descries the labels in this screen Table 20 System Settings Billing Billing Profile Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION No This read only field displays the index number of the billing profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the billing profile for identification purposes Description Enter a description for this billing profile Price Duration Select a time period minute hour day week month or Unlimited and enter the time unit in the field provided not available for Unlimited Charge Specify the unit cost in this field Check Time Select Period Time Finish for time to finish billing m
209. he file transfer process 31 3 Activating SSL Security Follow the steps below to activate the SSL security in the VSG 1 Click System Settings Servers in the navigation panel and select the SSL Security check box in the Web Server field Figure 150 System Settings Server Configuration Enable SSL Security Web Server Server Server Port 80 SSL Security Administrator Idle Timeout 500 Min s 1 1440 C Disable C DHCP Relay DHCP Server IP Address DHCP Se twa 2 Click Apply to save the changes and restart the VSG when prompted 3 Enable SSL security in the Authentication screen Click System Setting and Authentication in the navigation panel 4 A screen displays as shown Select Enable in the SSL Login Security field 207 Chapter 31 SSL Certificate VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 151 System Settings Authentication Activate SSL Login endor Specific fidor Cov 0 Attribute Send VSA together with Authentication Request Idle Time Out 5 Min s 1 1440 SSL Login Security Disable Enable Smart Client Support WISPr Smart Client amp Directly Reply C Proxy Reply with Redirect Login Page URL Login Made C Proxy Reply with Specific URL 5 Click Apply to save the changes and restart the VSG when prompted 31 4 Installing SSL Certificate on a Computer After you enable and activate the SSL login security on the VSG you can access the VSG through a s
210. he statement printer 4 Check that you select Statement Printer Device in the Console Type field in the System Screen 5 4 Make sure you configure and associate a billing profile for the first button in the Dynamic Account Operator Panel screen The first button corresponds to the button on the statement printer 233 Chapter 33 Troubleshooting VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 87 Product Specifications General Standard IEEE 802 3 10BASE T Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX Fast Ethernet Interface One 10 100 Ethernet WAN port One 10 100 Ethernet LAN port One RS232 serial port for console setting or an external statement printer One PMS RS232 serial port One reset button Networking Plug and play subscriber Internet access Supports 1024 simultaneous users NAT RFC1631 LAN DHCP server with client pool size of 512 and DHCP relay HTTP proxy SMTP DNS redirection WAN connection static IP DHCP client PPPoE PPTP NAT for VPN IPSec PPTP Web based authentication RADIUS AAA Secondary RADIUS server Proprietary CAS Central Authentication Service Global roaming support Built in Authentication and accounting Vendor Specific Attributes Static Dynamic Accounting Security Port based VLAN Layer 2 isolation VPN pass through PPTP L2TP SSL secure user login process SSL secure web based administration Authorized remote management M
211. hout tampering with the system configuration The default user name and password are account With the supervisor account you can only view the system status and change the supervisor account password The default user name are supervisor The super subscriber account is used for testing the Internet connection between the VSG and the ISP There is no time limitation or billing imposed on this account Thus anyone who logs in with this account is able to gain Internet access for free The default super subscriber user name and password are super 3 6 Changing System Login Passwords Note It is recommended that you change the system login passwords 45 Chapter 3 The Web Configurator VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide From the Main Menu screen click System Tools and System Account You can enter up to 20 alphanumerical characters for the account user name and password and they are case sensitive Figure 15 System Tools System Account Administrator Account Administrator can fully control this system and modify all settings Username admin Password nmm Confirm Accounting Manager Accounting Operator allows front desk clerk to operate the web based accounting system without touching the other system configuration Username account Password md Confirm Supervisor Account Supervisor can only view system status and change password Username supervisor Password GEE Confirm Super Subscriber Account
212. ically 96 glossary 30 H hardware installation 38 desktop 38 rack mounting 38 hardwired address 188 High Speed Internet Access See HSIA Hilton Group Corporation Hop Count 165 host name 56 hotspot 32 HSIA 80 IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority 85 idle timeout 43 IEEE802 1q VLAN 112 information window 127 example 128 session timeout messages 127 setup 128 in room billing 91 install SSL certificate 208 installation option 38 interface 234 IP Address 165 IP address 236 setup 256 IP address assignment 224 236 important note 256 IP address conflicts 236 scenario 1 236 scenario 2 236 scenario 3 237 scenario 4 237 IP address setup 256 DNS information 258 263 install components 257 Macintosh OS 8 9 263 Macintosh OS X 265 verify settings 259 263 266 Windows 2000 NT XP 259 Windows 95 98 Me 256 IP Static Route 164 ipconfig 263 L LAN bandwidth management 144 LAN device accessing via the VSG 190 management example 162 port mapping 160 remote management 160 190 status 189 LAN device management 160 LAN devices 160 LAN port 40 cable pin assignment 253 LAN port the 253 local management 40 Location Identifier 113 log schedule 171 login subscriber 35 logs 170 171 formats 173 name 172 time interval 173 Index 278 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide MAC Media Access Control 188 maintenance 35 Management Information Base MIB 179 management interface 30 35 manual firmware up
213. icle Background Color User Agreement Page User Agreement Page E zl Max 100 characters 000000 View Color Grid 000000 View Color Grid FFFFFF View Color Grid FFFFFF View Color Grid Agree Ma e Standard User Agreement Page Preview Sus The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Customization Account Printout LABEL DESCRIPTION Title Enter a title up to 100 characters for the user agreement page Title Text Color Set the color of the title text For example use 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values Article Enter a block of text up to 12000 characters long in the text box This is the restrictions or conditions that you want the user to agree to before allowing Internet access Article Text Color Set the color of the article text For example use 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values Article Background Color Specify the background color of the article text color For example enter 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values Page Background Color Set the background color for the article For example use FFFFFF for white Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corr
214. ient is given a new unused IP address E mail Server Redirect You can set the VSG to redirect and send subscriber s E mail via a specified e mail server This feature allows subscribers to send E mail via the local E mail server when their default e mail server is not working or prevented by relay restrictions Chapter 7 Server 72 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 10 System Settings Server continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address or Domain Specify the IP address or the domain name of the e mail server to which Name the VSG forwards e mail SMTP Port Specify the port number 25 is the default for SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Enter a number between 2500 and 2599 Apply Click Apply to save the settings 73 Chapter 7 Server VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 8 NAT Pool This chapter shows how to configure Network Address Translation NAT on the WAN for VPN packets 8 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 8 1 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the VSG for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes
215. ification authority s digital signature and a certificate validity time limit and other optional information fields 31 1 2 Certificate Authorities A Certification Authority CA issues digital certificates and guarantees the identity of the certificate owner When someone requests a certificate from a CA the CA requires proof of identity There are both commercial certificate authorities like CyberTrust and VeriSign as well as government certificate authorities 31 2 Downloading SSL Certificate to the VSG After you apply for and receive a certificate from a certificate authority import the certificate and the private key to the VSG Click System Tools and SSL Certificate in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Chapter 31 SSL Certificate 206 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 149 SSL Certificate Password Certificate File Private Key File SSL Certificate Download Cd ff 4 Browse EEN Browse The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 SSL Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Enter the secret password you used when applying for the certificate Note This password must be the same as the one you entered at the CA s site when creating a certificate Certificate File Specify the certificate sent to you by a CA Private Key File Specify the file that holds the private key Apply Click Apply to start t
216. import the certificate Chapter 31 SSL Certificate 210 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 157 Certificate Import Wizard Finish x Completing the Certificate Import Wizard You have successfully completed the Certificate Import wizard You have specified the Following settings Certificate Store Selected Automatically determined by t Content Certificate 7 A Root Certificate Store window displays as shown Click Yes to store the certificate to the computer Figure 158 Root Certificate Store Root certificate store x A Do you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store Subject mail localhost com www localhost com Local Host Local Group Local City Local State 00 Issuer Self Issued Time Validity Tuesday November 05 2002 through Friday November 02 2012 Serial Number 00 Thumbprint shal 95227DB8 13ESFA87 B7F15129 A1AG19EB GEDEO746 Thumbprint md5 883B7442 68716213 CACDO1AF F38C9C15 8 When the certificate is saved successfully a Certificate Import Wizard window displays Click OK Figure 159 Certificate Import Wizard x G The import was successful 9 A Certificate window displays the detailed information Notice that the certificate is now trusted 211 Chapter 31 SSL Certificate VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 160 Certificate Detailed Information General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This certificate is intend
217. ined option select the first option and choose a bandwidth from the drop down list box To manually set the bandwidth select the second option and specify the bandwidth in the field provided Maximum Downstream Bandwidth To use a pre defined option select the first option and choose a bandwidth from the drop down list box To manually set the bandwidth select the second option and specify the bandwidth in the field provided 16 2 2 Class of Service Bandwidth Setup To set the VSG to impose different bandwidth limits based on the configurations in a RADIUS server or a billing profile select Class of service based on RADIUS or Billing profile settings in the Bandwidth Management screen You must then set the bandwidth management on a RADIUS server or in a billing profile Refer to Chapter 10 on page 88 to set the bandwidth limits in a billing profile Figure 95 Bandwidth Management Class of Service Bandwidth Management Equal bandwidth for all subscribers The function enables administrator to limit bandwidth usage on a per user basis MAC address That prevents users from consuming a disproportionately large amount of bandwidth so every user gets a fair share of the available bandwidth Maximum Upstream Bandwidth amp 256Kbps v C 0 Kbps 64 24576 Maximum Downstream Bandwidth 256Kbps v C 10 Kbps 64 24576 Bandwidth Management Class of service based on RADIUS or billing profile settings
218. is field displays the index number Destination IP Address This field displays the IP address of the final destination Destination Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the final destination 165 Chapter 22 Static Route VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 52 Advanced Static Route continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Gateway IP This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Address Hop Count This field displays the cost of this static route Interface This field displays whether the static routing setting is applied on the LAN or WAN interface Delete Select this option and click Delete to remove the selected static route s Chapter 22 Static Route 166 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 167 Chapter 22 Static Route VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 23 Private LAN This chapter shows you how to set up a private LAN that allows specified devices to communicate with each other 23 1 Private LAN Overview By default the IP Plug and Play iPnP and layer 2 isolation features see Section 5 1 on page 56 are enabled to prevent devices on the LAN from communicating with each other These features provide additional security protection However you can configure a private LAN to allow communication between devices with the specified IP addresses in the Private LAN screen The VSG does not apply iPnP or layer 2 isolation on the devices in a pri
219. it your business model C Scenario A Yes Output bill to AG Number of copies 1 7 Port Location Mapping No Option Yes Time to Finish Based on Room C Based on Subscriber Need to continue configuring Billing and choose at lease one active billing profile Need to continue configuring Port Location Mapping Table C Scenario B Yes General Yes Yes Yes Time to Finish Need to continue configuring Billing and choose at lease one active billing profile Scenario C No General Yes Option No Time to Finish C Accumulation Idle Timeout 5 Min s t 1940 Accumulation account will be deleted after logged in days Allow Credit Card Payment Chapter 9 Authentication The following table describes each scenario 86 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 18 System Authentication Scenario Guide OPTION DESCRIPTION SAMPLE SUBSCRIBER LOGIN SCREEN Scenario A Select this option to use PMS Figure 34 Subscriber Login Scenario A billing with port location mapping 9 p pping Welcome Once you configure the port location mappings subscribers are Please choose from the following service selection 1 day 10 00 x able to access the Internet without How many units of Internet access would you like to purchase 7 entering usernames and Please kindly note that there will be no refund once conn
220. kxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkx k 7 When the file transfer is complete the VSG automatically reboots Wait until the VSG finishes rebooting before accessing the VSG again 32 9 2 Changing the Administrator Login Password Note It is recommended you change the default administrator login password To change other system login passwords use the web configurator Follow the steps below to change the administrator login password 1 In the main menu type 5 and press ENTER to display the Utilities menu 2 In the Utilities menu type 2 and press ENTER The Change Administrator Password menu displays Figure 174 SMT Change Administrator Password Change Administrator Password Enter the old password Enter the new password Confirm the new password 3 Type your current system password in the Enter the old password field and press ENTER 4 Type your new system password in the Enter the new password field and press ENTER 5 Re type your new system password in the Confirm the new password field for confirmation and press ENTER 6 Save the settings Chapter 32 Using The SMT 226 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide GE Note Note that as you type a password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type 32 10 Restart Follow the steps below to restart the VSG 1 In the main menu type 6 and press ENTER A screen displays prompting you to confirm Figure 175 SMT Restart
221. ll web pages provides a consistent way to access the configuration screens Click each heading to expand the menu Figure 11 Web Configurator Navigation Panel Configuration Menu amp Configuration Menu HE System Settin Ho Advanced Setting Egg System Status HE System Tools 3 3 2 Screen Specific Links In some screens a link panel displays on the top of the screen that allows you to navigate to advanced configuration screens An example is shown in the figure below Figure 12 Navigation Panel Screen specific Links Static Account Dynamic Account Static Account Setting Create Static Account Static Account Operator Static Account List 3 4 Screen Overview The following table lists the various web configurator screens Table 2 Web Configurator Screen Overview SYSTEM SETTINGS Ede EE SYSTEM STATUS SYSTEM TOOLS Sy System Setting Sy Advanced Setting Fa System Status System Tools System Credit Card Bj System OM 3 WAN LAN 9 Customization ij Current User List Firmware 3 Server 3 Bandwidth DHCP Clients Aj System Account m NAT Pool 2 Portal Page Session List l SSL Certificate Authentication Advertisement B NAT Pool Table Restart Billing Walled Garden LAN Devices Logout Accounting Passthrough _ Billing Log Port Location Filtering i PMS Transaction ME E Privileg
222. llowing table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Logs Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select this option to record and send this type of logs to the syslog server s Configure syslog server settings in the Syslog screen Email Selec this option to send this type of logs to the specified email address es Configure email address settings in the Syslog screen Syslog Name This field displays the name or type of the log Select the check box es to send the syslog Chapter 24 Syslog 172 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 55 Logs Log Settings continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Description This field displays a short description about the syslog Interval Time This field displays how often the VSG sends the logs If available enter the number of minutes the VSG waits between sending the syslog Type This field displays the type number of a log This number is read only Apply Click Apply to save the settings The following table describes the log formats Table 56 Logs Log Format SYSLOG NAME FORMAT CREATED System Information Id MAC Address System Uptime lt 0 days 00h 04m 00s gt WAN lt FrameTxOK FrameRxOK FrameTxError FrameRxError gt LAN FrameTxOK FrameRxOk FrameTxError FrameRxError gt Each time interval specified between 1 and 10080 minutes System Boot Notice Id lt MAC Address gt System Up Each ti
223. lls the subscribers when they should use their purchased Internet access service before the displayed time Ending Select this check box to display a message to display at the end of the printout Enter the message in the text box provided Serial Number Select this check box to display a serial number on the printout Preview of PC Connected printer for Static Account printout Click this link to display a preview of a static account printout as it would print on a printer connected to a computer Preview of account generator printer with Static Account printout Click this link to display a preview of a static account printout as it would print on a statement printer Preview of PC Connected printer for Dynamic Account printout Click this link to display a preview of a dynamic account printout as it would print on a printer connected to a computer Preview of account generator printer with Dynamic Account printout Click this link to display a preview of a dynamic account printout as it would print on a statement printer Apply Click Apply to save the changes Note The account information printout for a static account varies depending on whether PMS billing is used or not The following figures show the account printout examples Chapter 15 Customization 130 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 75 Static Account Printout Example Welcome Username
224. m for North American products ZyXEL Limited Warranty 7 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp CORPORATE www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II HEADQUARTERS Science Park WORLDWIDE sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan soporte zyxel co cr 506 2017878 www zyxel co cr ZyXEL Costa Rica COSTA RICA Plaza Roble Escazu sales zyxel co cr 506 2015098 ftp zyxel co cr Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica CZECH REPUBLIC info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modranska 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej DENMARK sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark support zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND a Malminkaari 10 sales
225. mapping rule 113 Chapter 13 Port Location Mapping VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 29 System Setting Port Location Mapping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Batch Create Set the related fields to create a specified number of port location mappings Location ID From Enter an identity up to 20 characters of the first location for a mapping This field must match the VLAN ID of a port Port ID From Enter the an ID number between 1 and 999999 of the starting port for this mapping This is the location ID number you set in the PMS Batch Numbers Specify the number of port location mappings you want to create at a time Status Select No Charge if you don t want to bill a subscriber accessing the Internet at this port location Select Charge for use to bill a subscriber accessing the Internet at this port location Select Blocked to stop any subscriber from accessing the Internet at this port location Add to List Click Add to List to insert a new mapping rule Backup Restore You can back up or restore the port location mappings Backup Click Backup to Local PC to save the current port location mappings to a computer To back up the current port location mapping to a TFTP server specify the IP address of the TFTP server and the file name in the fields provided and click Apply Restore Make sure you have previously backed up the port location mapping No
226. me when the device reboots System Account Activity Information Id lt MAC Address gt System Account Activity Information lt Username User IP Status gt Where Username Administrator Supervisor Accounting Operator User IP IP Address Status Login Logout Idle Time Out Each time when the system account logs in or logs out Account Created Id lt Mac Address gt Account Create lt username Account usage time Billing profile information gt Where Username Single account lt username gt or Batch account lt prefix from to postfix gt Billing profile information index name When an account is created Subscriber Trace Id lt MAC Address gt Subscriber Trace lt username user IP user MAC interface login time logout time RxData count TxData count gt When a subscriber logs out Logged in Users Id lt MAC Address gt Logged in Users lt Number of Logged in Each time interval Where Charge From PMS Dynamic Billing profile name Name Log time MM DD YYYY HH MM SS Usage time x minutes Expire when 00 00 Billing profile information index name users Start Number End Number Username user IP user specified MAC interface login time RxData count TxData count gt additional information User Agreement Billing Log Id lt Mac Address gt Billing Log lt Username Billing profile When a log is information Log tim
227. mmunicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the VSG 1200 V2 s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 256 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 191 WIndows 95 98 Me Network Configuration Network LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCP IP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI T NIC 3C9 for Microsoft Networks iG Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 257 Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide
228. n TCP IP Properties 21 xl Bindings Advanced Netpios DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Domain Suffix Search Order Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways Ifyou have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your VSG 1200 V2 and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 In the Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP 1 For Windows XP click start Control Panel In Windows 2000 NT click Start Settings Control Panel 259 Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 194 Windows XP Start Menu 5 Internet Explorer ei My Documents fs Outlook Express Y Paint Files and Settings Transfer W B Command Prompt e My Music EJ Acrobat Reader 4 0 Ws My Computer Tour Windows XP E Windows Movie Maker B Control Panel 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures te Printers and Faxes Help and Support Search All Programs gt 177 Run
229. n external RADIUS server or the built in billing function and local subscriber database Connect an access point AP to bridge the wired and the wireless network allowing wireless stations to access the Internet through the VSG Figure 2 Application Internet Access in Public Areas V i a tf e 1 i i i 1 3 3 Hotel Application with PMS The following figure depicts an example where the VSG is used in a hotel to provide Internet service as one of their in room services Billing is done through an existing PMS in the hotel Figure 3 Application Hotel PMS E pem Y Internet Mm p Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG 36 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 37 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install the VSG and make hardware connections 2 1 Installation Options The following sections describe the different installation options Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes and leave adequate space on the rear and sides of the VSG during hardware installation or when stacking 2 1 1 Desktop Installation 1 Make sure the VSG is clean and dry Set the VSG on a smooth space strong enough to support the weight of the VSG and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 2 Make sure there is enough clearance around the VSG to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables an
230. n name Billing Profile SP Button Max 12 characters Button 1 SP 100 200 Button A Buoni Frotie1 7 Button 2 SP 200 Button B Buton2 Profle1 gt Button 3 SP 200 Button C Buton3 Profle Button 4 Butona Profile1 General Settings Flexible Digit 8 7 digits of Dynamic Account Username amp Password 4 8 General Settings Unused Accounts Automatically delete after J12 hours M Allow concurrent access with one account Concurrent Access Max concurrent access 2 Number of copies to print 1 7 Printout cop x Customize printout text Statement Printer Gk Print to PC Connected Printer Ck The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Accounting Dynamic Account Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Web based Statement Panel Settings No This read only field displays the button index number Button 1 4 The button numbers correspond to the buttons displayed in the Dynamic Account Operator Panel screen Refer to Section 12 3 1 on page 106 for more information SP Button This read only field displays the button label on the statement printer Refer to Figure 54 on page 106 Refer to Section 12 3 2 on page 107 for more information on generating dynamic accounts using a statement printer Button name Specify the name of the web based button up to 12 characters in the field provided The buttons are displayed in the Dynamic
231. n proceed to configure the Billing and Accounting settings to complete your setup Current preset option Scenario C Select option C RADIUS Check Local Account first Accumulation C Time to Finish No idle timeout Server IP address Primary RADIUS Authentication Port Server Accounting Port Shared Secret Server IP address Secondary RADIUS Authentication Port Server Accounting Port Shared Secret Retry Attempts when Primary failed ga Retry Frequency B seconds 3 75 Disable Accounting Service Enable Update every 0 Min s Authentication CHAP Method oe Vendor Specific Vendor Code 0 ATT Attribute Send VSA together with Authentication Request Idle Time Out E Min s 1 1440 SSL Login Security Disable C Enable Smart Client Support WISPr Smart Client Directly Reply Proxy Reply with Redirect Login Page URL Proxy Reply with Specific URL Login Mode 83 Chapter 9 Authentication VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 System Settings Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION No Authentication Select this option to disable subscriber authentication Subscribers can access the Internet without entering user names and passwords This is the default setting User Agreement Select User Agreement to direct a subscriber to an Internet service usage agreement page before accessing the Internet
232. n timeout messages 127 session trace 176 example 177 filename convention 177 number of records 176 setup 176 TFTP server 177 Setting up your computer s IP address 256 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 178 SMT 30 214 accessing 214 basic configuration 214 idle timeout period 215 LAN setup 222 login 215 main menu 216 menu overview 215 navigating 216 navigation keystrokes 217 System status 223 WAN setup 218 SNMP 178 community 180 components 178 Get 179 GetNext 179 management model 178 object variables 179 overview 178 privilege 180 protocol operations 179 Set 179 setup 179 Trap 179 versions supported 178 SNMP agent 178 SNMP manager 178 SNMP port 180 SP 200 246 button labels 106 creating dynamic accounts 107 mapping profiles to buttons 104 report printing 246 specifications 234 SSL 85 206 activate 207 certificate 206 download certificate to VSG 206 Index 280 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide install certificate 208 requirement 206 SSL certificate information 186 standard subscriber login screen 121 statement printer 40 95 104 106 246 statement printer port 35 40 static IP address 219 static route 34 Static Routing Topology 164 static subscriber account 94 auto create 96 backup 98 create 95 display 102 edit 100 global settings 94 manual create 97 printout preview 101 restore 99 status 184 subnet 268 subnet mask 270 subnetting 270 subscriber idle timeout 85 subscriber account 93 backup
233. n to activate SSL security By default SSL login security is disabled 71 Chapter 7 Server VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 10 System Settings Server continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator Idle Timeout Specify how many minutes between 1 and 1440 the web configuration can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your username and password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Note This does NOT apply to the SMT management session DHCP Server Select the DHCP mode on the LAN Disable Select this option to disable DHCP server on the LAN DHCP Relay Select this option to set the VSG to forward network configuration requests to a DHCP server on the LAN network Then configure the DHCP Server IP Address field DHCP Server IP Address If you select DHCP Relay enter the IP address of the real DHCP server DHCP Server Private Select this option to set the VSG to assign network information such as IP address DNS information etc to Ethernet device s connected to the LAN port This is the default setting IP Pool Start Address Enter the first of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool The default is 10 59 1 2 based on the default management LAN IP address of 10 59 1 1 Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Enter a number not greater than 512
234. nageable switch and access point over the Internet Figure 106 LAN Device Remote Management Example 1 Access Point IP 10 59 1 2 MAC 00 A0 C5 01 23 45 Web Server Port 80 DERE e R Ed Internet Manageable Switch VSG IP 10 59 13 lt MAC 00 00 1C 01 01 6C Web Server Port 80 You map virtual port 60001 on the VSG to the web server port on the access point and 60002 to the web server port on the manageable switch Figure 107 LAN Devices Example 1 LAN Devices Accommodate up to 300 entries Polling Interval i Min s No Device Name Virtual Port Device Device Device Application 60001 60300 IP Address Server Port MAC Address 1 We je foss2 fo 5 oaacsoaaas TCP s 3 Ed Ih Jr dIE MIE N SS AS iS dll To access the web based management interface enter the WAN IP address of your VSG and the virtual port number of the LAN device separated by a colon In this example to access the access point AP enter http 192 168 1 1 60001 where 192 168 1 1 is the WAN IP address of the VSG The login screen of the LAN device management interface should display Chapter 21 LAN Devices 162 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide You can also access the LAN devices through the VSG web configurator refer to Section 28 7 1 on page 190 for more information 21 2 2 Specifying an Inside Server Example Let s say you have a web server behind the VSG as shown in the next figure Figure 108 LAN Devic
235. name and password again Select Based on Subscriber to allow a subscriber to freely move between different locations without prompting for user name and password Note You must activate the port location mapping feature Refer to Chapter 13 on page 112 Regenerate password of static account with PMS This feature is applicable when you select Scenario B with Built in Authentication in the Authentication screen see Figure 32 on page 83 Select Enable to automatically generate a new password for the static account checkout when a subscriber checks out Select Disable to keep the password for the static account unchanged after a subscriber checks out PMS Type Select a PMS system and specify the fields below if available Currently the VSG supports Micros Fidelio Spectrum MK II Marriott and Proprietary Micros Fidelio Revenue Code Enter a revenue code between 01 and 99 Description Enter the description for the revenue Refer to the user s guide that comes with your PMS device Chapter 10 Billing 92 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 21 System Setting Billing PMS Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Spectrum MK II Revenue Code Enter a revenue code between 01 and 99 Description Enter a description to identify the service For example Internet Marriott Revenue Code Enter a revenue code between 01 and 99 Refer
236. name obtained by a DHCP server is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the VSG via DHCP Figure 19 System Setting System System System Host Name Domain Name Location Name Max 50 Address Max 200 City Max 50 State Province oo Max 50 Zip Postal Code Maa Country 4 Max 50 Contact Name EE N Max 50 Contact Telephone EI Max 50 Contact FAX M Max 50 Contact Email WETE EE Max 50 Date 2006 7 IE z 15 Year Month Day Time 08 7 06 7 44 tou Minute Second Get from my Computer Get from NTP server Use NTP Network Time Protocol Time Server Location Information Date Time Server IP Domain Name Time Zone GMT 12 00 v Update Time 0 hours b ood pe Ee o M Chapter 5 System 56 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide NAT Network Address Translation Layer 2 Isolation Security Console Type Console Port Administrator Authorized Acc IP Address Multicast Passthrough Allow remote user to ping the device SSL Certificate pdate Time hours Start Date 4 7 Month 1 z Day End Date 10 x Month 31 x Day Daylight Saving Time Enable IV IP Plug and Play iPnP Technology User Session Limit Unlimited c Ba 171024 e Disable Enable C Disable gt Console Setting C Statement Printer SP 100 Bits per second 960
237. namic Accounts You can only create dynamic accounts automatically You can create dynamic accounts using either the web configurator screen or the statement printer 12 3 1 Dynamic Account Generation Using the Web Configurator Display the Dynamic Account Operator Panel screen as shown next Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts 106 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 55 Dynamic Account Operator Panel Dynamic Account Operator Panel Click a button to automatically generate a dynamic account based on the configuration of the button Click a button to generate a dynamic account based on the settings you configure for the button in the Dynamic Account Setting screen A window displays showing a printout preview of the dynamic account generated The following figure shows an example Refer to Section 15 4 on page 129 on account printout to configure the printout page Figure 56 Dynamic Account Information Printout Example Welcome This is your account information please keep this for your Internet Service Username 2222zzrr Password 222222hh Usage Time 1 day Billing Time to Finish Profile 1 day 10 00 Purchase Unit 1 Total 10 00 2006 6 15 17 56 29 S N 000001 Please active your accou nt before 2006 6 16 05 56 29 Thank you very much 12 3 2 Dynamic Account Generation Using a Statement Printer Follow the steps below to create dynamic accounts and print the account i
238. nd Select None to set the background color of the article text block to white Color FFFFFF the default Select Background Color to set the background color of the article text block to the color specified for example enter 000000 for black Click View Color Grid to display a list of web friendly colors and corresponding hexadecimal values Information Enter information such address and telephone or fax numbers in the text box provided Up to 80 characters allowed Comments Enter any comments up to 80 characters long in the text box provided The following figure shows an example Figure 67 Subscriber Login Screen Example Advanced F WSG Login Microsoft Internet Explorer Hie Edt vew Favontes Tods Help Be sm D gt A A Actress 2 deel Welcome to ZyXEL Welcome Slogan Plesse enter your guest account user name and password to access the Interne Welcame Username Password Enter Clear Need help Contact technical support at Ext 101 Information Comment Your quest account user name and password ars case sensitive 15 2 4 Framed Login Screen The Frame login screen splits the login screen into two frames top and bottom You can specify a web site to be displayed in the top frame with the user name and password prompt displayed in the bottom frame The frame login screen is useful for you to link to a web site such
239. nd the Manual Firmware Upgrade link to display the screen as shown Figure 145 Firmware Manual Upgrade Using TFTP Manual Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the firmware click Browse to locate the firmware file and click Apply or use remote TFTP server Local PC File Path Browse Apply TFTP Server IP Address Binary File Name Apply 5 Specify the IP address of the TFTP server in the TFTP Server IP Address field 6 Specify the name of the firmware file in the Binary File Name field 7 Click Apply to start the file transfer process 8 When the file transfer is completed successfully the following message displays and the VSG automatically restarts to complete the firmware upgrade process 9 After the VSG finishes restarting access the web configurator again Check the firmware version number in the System Status screen 203 Chapter 30 Firmware VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 30 3 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade You can set the VSG to automatically check and download a new firmware from a TFTP server This allows you to automate the firmware upgrade process if you have more than one VSG on your network A synchronization file contains information on firmware version and filename A sample synchronization file is shown next Figure 146 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade Synchronization File Example Synchronization Check File Sample Code Version 1 00 02 error no project name define You have to manually download
240. nfigure filters to restrict access to the specified IP addresses through the VSG 19 1 Filter Setup You can set the VSG to restrict access to specified IP address es via the VSG You can prevent subscribers from accessing certain web sites for example playboy based on the IP address To configure a filter click Advanced and Filtering in the navigation panel Figure 102 Advanced Filter ENABLE FILTER Filtering allows the system administrator to have a list of restricted destinations NO IP ADDRESS NO IP ADDRESS 1 4 a 2 5 3 OO 6 IP Address Range NO IP ADDRESS FILTER Single IP Address The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 49 Filter FIELD DESCRIPTION ENABLE FILTER Select this option to activate this feature Single IP Address Chapter 19 Filter 156 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 49 Filter continued FIELD DESCRIPTION No This read only field displays the index number of an entry IP Address Specify the IP address of a network device you want to block Internet access through the VSG Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation For example 10 59 1 10 IP Address Range No This read only field displays the index number of an entry IP Address Specify a range of IP addressed for the network devices you want to block Internet access through the VSG Enter the beginning and ending IP addresses in
241. nformation using a statement printer Note You have to purchase a statement printer separately 1 Connect the statement printer to the port labeled CONSOLE Refer to Section 2 2 on page 39 for more information 2 Configure the Console Type field in the System screen Refer to Section 5 1 on page 56 3 Turn on the statement printer and make sure there is printing paper 107 Chapter 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 4 Press the button on the statement printer A dynamic account is generated and the account information should be printed Refer to Figure 79 on page 133 for a printout example Note The settings of the buttons on the statement printer correspond to the three SP 200 buttons you set in the Dynamic Account Operator Panel screen Refer to Section 12 2 on page 104 12 4 Viewing the Dynamic Account List To display the dynamic account list click Dynamic Account List Click a heading to sort the entries in ascending or descending order based on the column if applicable Figure 57 Dynamic Account List refresh 2 222222tt S N Username Password Billing Profile Time Created First Login Expiration Status Delete 1 2222zztt 222222 1 Profile 1 09 43 07 21 43 07 Not In Use NE NE EE NE NR H First 4 Previous Next gt End M Go 1E Page Dynamic Account List Backup Print List 2006 06 21 2006 06 21 The following table describes the labels in this scr
242. ng figure shows an example Chapter 28 System Status 192 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 131 Billing Log Backup Example File Content Billing Log Profile NO Username Location BillingProfile Log Time Usage Time Bill Charge from Status 1 222222tt Profile 1 2006 06 21 09 43 07 1 day s 10 00 Dynamic Un used 2 2222zzrr Profile 1 2006 06 21 09 42 29 1 day s 10 00 Dynamic Un used 3 22227267 Profile 1 2006 06 15 17 56 29 1 day s 10 00 Dynamic In Use 4 Cindy Profile 1 2006 06 21 09 31 08 1 day s 10 00 Static In Use 28 9 PMS Transaction This screen is applicable when account billing is done using a PMS To display transaction messages between the VSG and PMS click System Status and PMS Transaction Figure 132 System Status PMS Transaction Log PMS Transaction Log Clear log HST MDS LS DA040726 T1151913 28 10 Static Route Table You can view the list of static routes configured in the Static Route Table screen Click System Status and Static Route Table to display the screen Figure 133 System Status Static Route Table Static Route Table No Destination IP Address Destination Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Hop Count X Interface 1 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 1 WAN 193 Chapter 28 System Status VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 System Status Static Route Table
243. ng two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning TERRE BEER A EER efe ERSTER GS RING H G BUNTIETHS ERAT BERE BERE ERGE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada
244. nsaction and Login 15 6 3 Successful Page You can customize the notification screen to display on the subscriber s computer when the credit card is validated and the transaction is successful Scroll down the Credit Card Customization screen and configure the Successful Page fields and click Apply to save the changes 139 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 87 Credit Card Customization Successful Page Successful Page Customize the message for the successful page Successful Message Notification Message 1 Notification Message 2 Account Information You may now use the Internet Max 80 characters IMPORTANT Make a note of your username and p Max 160 characters This is your account information please keep this f Max 160 characters Your username is Username Ma 0 characters Your password is Password Ma 0 characters 4 Your usage time is Usage Time Expiration Time Email Button Submit Button Max 80 characters Please activate your account before Max 80 characters Format Yyvy mm dd HH mm ss HH 24h hh 12h tt AM PM Email this webpage to myself Max 40 characters Use this account to LOGIN now Max 40 characters Q Preview of Successful Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Credit Card Customization Successful Page LABEL DESCRIPTION
245. o the next page End Click End to go to the last page 28 8 1 Billing Logs Backup Follow the steps below to back up billing logs to a computer 1 In the Billing Log screen click the Export to Txt File link A File Download screen displays Figure 129 Billing Log Backup File Download Fie pownioad x 9 Some files can harm your computer If the file information below tf looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file File name bill log File type From 10 59 1 1 Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer Open ii E Cancel More Info IV Always ask before opening this type of file 2 Select Save this file to disk and click OK A Save As window displays Figure 130 Billing Log Backup Save As Save in 5 Local Disk C 1 e amp rtE C3 WLITemp AccessLog20060209 120204 My Music 2 DeviceList20060209 120204 mysal EventLog20060209 120204 Postgresal f rulmanual Program Files Login20060209 120204 swsetup PVC20060209 120204 TEMP i rom 0 TFTP Root a TEMPtmp ed Tmp T wat 34u install guide WINNT Cl wat634u manual BI History Desktop My Documents MI My Computer AJ a File name bilog 7 My Network P Save as type Document x Cancel 3 Specify the file name and or location and click Save to start the backup process To view the billing logs open the log file using any text editor The followi
246. oduct Specifications VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Appendix B IP Address Assignment Conflicts This appendix describes situations where IP address conflicts may occur Subscribers with duplicate IP addresses will not be able to access the Internet Scenario 1 The VSG is using the same LAN and WAN IP addresses The following figure shows an example where the VSG is using a WAN IP address that is the same as the IP address of a computer on the LAN Figure 178 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 1 WAN IP 10 59 1 1 EN wENEXEE O m m EXE Moses dl VSG outer Computer IP 10 59 1 1 You must set the VSG to use different LAN and WAN IP addresses on different subnets if you enable DHCP server on the VSG For example you set the WAN IP address to 192 59 1 1 and the LAN IP address to 10 59 1 1 Otherwise It is recommended the VSG use a public WAN IP address Scenario 2 The VSG LAN IP address conflicts with the DHCP client IP address In the following figure the VSG is acting as a DHCP server The VSG assigns an IP address which is the same as its LAN port IP address to a DHCP client attached to the LAN Figure 179 IP Address Conflicts Scenario 2 LAN IP 10 59 1 1 Ves SSS ee x sd NEE Router Computer VSG IP 10 59 1 1 N To solve this problem make sure the VSG LAN IP address is not in the DHCP IP address pool Appendix B IP Address Assignment Conflicts 236 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide
247. of Contents VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 1524 Framed Login GEE Lecta tpi bo etc ad agri e a E ERE LARA NI Add 124 15 2 5 Login Service Sel iiu eene rotten itn nra xo CR Eed 125 15 3 infomaton Window OE N AE EE EE EE EE 127 TA AS EE ia EE AE La taa o ta dx 129 159 User ie MEE RE N AO amatuer 133 196 ede n N NE EE EE 135 15 0 1 ED Gee da ORE EE OE ctc o nd Li ER 135 RE ER eise RE OO N Ed 136 Prosecco 139 ips Fan Page mI T E I LE NE 141 NAUES e MR 142 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management s uas seen Kies iue kk REI BE EER RE KERR b ERA REK RE EG e ke 144 16 1 Bandwidth Management Overview ius ss ees ses Re Ke ke AE Rek ee AE Ee KA ee Re Ke AA ee ki 144 10 1 Bandwidth Beal 5 2 1003 9 TT 144 16 2 Activating Bandwidth Management ccsecccccsseseccecceesseececeeeseeeeeeneeseees 144 16 2 1 Egual Bandwidth Sell iese EER ED is ERAS NE Ke AA Eie N 145 16 2 2 Class of Service Bandwidth Setup EE EA EE EE AR ek 146 Chapter 17 Portal Page Advertisement Link and Walled Garden 148 AUS SE TCU OE mr Top ER 148 Te sede RA EE IE 148 per EE IG OAR c E 149 TA Walled Gardon oe OR TEE 149 Chapter 18 PASSO is eie ER ie GR RE GR ee Ee ODE 152 18 1 Passthirough OUOPVIGMW sesse RIES EEUE Oe De VERE DRS EE EGO EE Ee GN EE Ee DES NEE EED 152 18 2 Computer IP and MAC Address Passthrough see se ee ee ee 152 18 2 1 Destination URL and IP Address Passthrough
248. om the drop down list box Stop bits Select the stop bit from the drop down list box Administrator Select Any to use any computer to access the web configurator on the VSG Authorized Access Select Specify and then enter the IP address es or a range of IP addresses of the IP Address computer s that is allowed to log in to configure the VSG Multicast Select Enable to allow multicast traffic to pass through the VSG This may affect Passthrough your network performance Select Disable to prevent any multicast traffic from passing through the VSG This is the default setting Allow remote user to ping the device Select Enable to respond to Ping requests from the LAN or WAN interface Select Disable to not respond to Ping requests from the LAN or WAN interface SSL Certificate Certificate Secure Socket Layer SSL security allows you to create a secure connection between the VSG and the client computer s Select Default to use the default system generated SSL certificate Select Custom Certificate to use a certificate obtained from a certificate authority Refer to Chapter 31 on page 206 for more information Apply Click Apply to save the changes Chapter 5 System VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 6 LAN and WAN Setup This chapter shows you how to configure the LAN and WAN ports on the VSG 6 1 Factory Ethernet Defaults The Ethernet parameters of the VSG are preset to the followin
249. ompultet as My Network Ps Fie name sta acc Save Save as type ext Document Cancel You can view the backed up file using any text editing program 11 4 2 Restoring a Static Account List You may restore the static account list if you accidentally reset the VSG back to the factory defaults and erased the subscriber account information Follow the steps below to restore a previously backed up subscriber account list 1 In the Create Static Subscriber Account screen and scroll down to the Static Accounts backup and restore section 99 Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 48 Static Subscriber Account Backup and Restore Static Accounts backup and restore Backup Click to save the account information to your computer To restore a previously saved account information file to your system select this option locate the account information file and click Apply File Path Browse 2 Specify the location and or file name of the account information file in the File Path field or click Browse to locate it 3 Click Apply to start the file transfer process The VSG automatically restarts after the file transfer 1s complete 11 5 Editing Subscriber Accounts To edit a subscriber account click System Settings Accounting and the Static Account Operator link to display the screen as shown next Figure 49 Static Account Operator refresh
250. on 6 0 or later with JavaScript support enabled Delete the temporary web files and log in again In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then click the Delete Files button When a Delete Files window displays select Delete all offline content and click OK Steps may vary depending on the version of your Internet browser 33 4 Internet Access A subscriber cannot connect to the Internet through the VSG Table 85 Troubleshooting Internet Access STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check your Internet settings on your modem and or router 2 Make sure the subscriber enters the correct user name and password to log in to the VSG The user name and password are case sensitive Make sure the account is still valid Make sure there is no conflict in IP address assignment Refer to the appendix Chapter 33 Troubleshooting 232 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 33 5 The Statement Printer This section is applicable when you purchase an external statement printer also known as an account generator printer I cannot print account information using a statement printer Table 86 Troubleshooting the Statement Printer STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure the statement printer is connected to a power source and is turned on Check that the statement printer is connected to the port labeled Console 1 2 3 Make sure there is enough printing paper in t
251. on List List of sessions of Network events and records or the newest 16384 incoming and outgoing packet information including source IP address destination IP address and port number No TCP UDP IP Client Port Client Port Fake IP Remote Port Remote Idle 1 TCP 10 59 1 2 1353 42005 203 160 232 7 80 25 2 TCP 10 59 1 2 1354 42006 203 160 232 7 80 25 nico 1l Page M First 4 Previous Next gt End M Done o ode meme z 159 Chapter 20 Privilege User VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 21 LAN Devices This chapter describes how you can remotely access devices on the LAN through the VSG 21 1 LAN Devices Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet Form example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network Traditionally when you have a device for example a switch on a LAN using NAT you cannot access the device from the WAN since the LAN device is assigned a private IP address Your VSG is a NAT enabled device that makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world 21 1 1 Port Mapping To make LAN devices behind the VSG visible to the outside world you configure a mapping between a virtual port on the VSG and a server port on a LAN device A virtual port is a port on the VSG that appears as a physical port to the attached devices
252. onization Check file is a file containing the latest firmware filename and Check File version number on the TFTP server Click View Sample File to display an example Enter the name of the check file Frequency Set how often Weekly Daily or Hourly you want to have the VSG check for new firmware and upgrade to new firmware if available default Weekly Then select the day applies only when you select Weekly the hour applies when you select Daily or Hourly and the minute that you want the VSG to do the check and upload Apply Click Apply to save the changes 205 Chapter 30 Firmware VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 31 SSL Certificate This chapter shows you how to set up Secure Socket Layer SSL certificates on the VSG 31 1 SSL Certificate Overview SSL Secure Socket Layer security is a standard Internet protocol for secure communications that uses a combination of certificate based authentication and public key encryption SSL protects data transfer between the web configurator on the VSG and the web browser on a connected computer With SSL security activated data such as user name and password transferred between the VSG and the computer is protected when you access the VSG using a web browser that supports SSL 31 1 1 Certificate A digital certificate also referred to as a certificate contains the key owner s name and public key the name of the issuing certification authority the cert
253. option to set the VSG to use a static or fixed IP address This is the default setting IP Address Enter the static IP address in dotted decimal notation The default WAN IP address is 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Default IP Gateway Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Primary Secondary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the primary and or secondary DNS servers 6 5 3 WAN Port Mode PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE functions as a dial up connection PPPoE is an IETF Internet Engineering Task Force draft standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem for example DSL cable wireless etc to achieve access to high speed data networks It preserves the existing Microsoft Dial Up Networking experience and requires no new learning or procedures Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup 64 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for instance RADIUS For the user PPPOE provides a login and authentication method that the existing Microsoft Dial Up Networking software can activate and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for Windows users One of the benefits of PPPOE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic s
254. ort Mode field C Use fixed IP address WAN Port Mode 5 Click Apply to save the changes C PPPoE Mostly for ADSL modem users C PPTP Mostly for Europe ADSL modem users 6 Click Apply again to restart dem the VSG 7 Log into the web configurator again and check that the VSG has obtained a WAN IP address in the System Status screen 4 3 Create a Billing Profile Next you create a billing profile that charges 5 per hour for Internet access and allows customers to purchase up to 15 hours of Internet access time 1 Click System Setting gt Billing to display the Billing Profile screen 2 Change the Currency and Number of Billing Profile decimal places fields if required Currency 8 Number of decimals places T No Active Name Description Profile Setting 3 To configure a new billing profile click lr ts EUN Taya cag Edit in a new entry o r cam 03 n Edt EE 04 r Edit 51 Chapter 4 Initial Setup Example VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 4 The Billing Profile Setting Billing Profile Setting screen displays In the Name No 2 field enter Standard for ame Stendera identification TEn Ries Duration Charge Check Time Selective Unit 5 Enter 5 hr in the F Femi 1 Description field minute add Tofo To 15 Charge field ES From 1 7 Enter 15 in the To field under alie Ed AE Too Selective Unit Leave all other Expire when 00 00 s
255. per Subscriber Account Once you have configured the Internet connection settings on the VSG you can use this account to test the Internet connection through the VSG Super Subscriber Select Enable to activate this account Select Disable to deactivate this account Idle Timeout By default the VSG automatically logs out a super subscriber after five minutes of inactivity Enter a number 1 to 1440 to set the VSG to log out the super subscriber after the specified inactivity timeout in minutes Username Enter the user name for the account manager account The default is super Password Enter a new account manager password The default is super Confirm Enter the new administrator password again for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save the changes back to the VSG 3 7 Resetting the VSG You can restore the device to the factory defaults in one of the following ways The RESET button on the front panel of the VSG press this button once Use this method for cases when the username and password of the VSG is not known refer to Section 2 2 1 5 on page 40 The web configurator refer to Section 3 7 on page 47 The SMT refer to Section 29 4 on page 200 3 8 Restarting the VSG Note You must restart the VSG every time you change the system IP address or upload a firmware or configuration file All unsaved changes will be lost once you restart the VSG In the Main Menu screen click Syst
256. plays the maximum number of users that can log in simultaneously for Internet access WAN MAC This field displays the MAC address of the VSG on the WAN Address LAN MAC This field displays the MAC address of the VSG on the LAN Address WAN IP Settings WAN Port This field displays the DHCP mode of the WAN port Mode IP Address This field displays the IP address of the WAN port on the VSG Subnet Mask _ This field displays the subnet mask of the WAN port on the VSG Default IP This field displays the IP address of the default gateway of the WAN port on the Gateway VSG DNS Primary DNS This field displays the IP address of the primary DNS server Server Secondary This field displays the IP address of the secondary DNS server DNS Server DHCP DHCP Status This field displays the DHCP mode Server Relay or Disable on the LAN Server IP This field is visible when the DHCP Status is Server or Relay Address This field displays the IP address of the DHCP server on the network Start IP This field is visible when the DHCP Status is Server or Relay Bude This field displays the first of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool rivate 185 Chapter 28 System Status VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 61 System Status System continued FIELD DESCRIPTION End IP This field is visible when the DHCP Status is Server Address This fi
257. puter s without extra software installation or computer configuration In addition with transparent proxy the VSG resolves any incompatible proxy settings Port Forwarding Use this feature to forward incoming service requests to a server on your local network DHCP Support DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows the individual computers DHCP clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a centralized DHCP server The VSG has built in DHCP server capability It can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to DHCP clients The VSG can also act as a surrogate DHCP server DHCP Relay where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the DHCP clients RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service The VSG allows you to maintain a central subscriber database on an external RADIUS server Subscriber accounting and authentication is then done through the external RADIUS server In addition the VSG supports Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs that allows enforcement of upload download bandwidth limits or specific advertisement web page per subscriber 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your VSG VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Local Subscriber Database The VSG allows you to maintain a subscriber database on the VSG without setting up an external RADIUS server Subscriber accounting and authentication are done using the local subscriber database Accounting Accounting can be don
258. r ie ee ee ER Ee RR AA ee ee ee ee 233 Table 67 Produet Specifications General sae EER ERENS IE GEED GEES EK REEN 234 Table 88 Product Specifications Performance and Management 235 Table 89 Product Specifications Physical and Environmental ssssss 233 Table pU VSG 1200 V2 Supported VSAS iuueni ern rat bred Li edits oa Le adi 243 Table 91 VSA related Error Messages iis skies Ee kk RA EER Se RA etnia naa ninth ena Ee eua nta Ad 244 Table 92 SP 200 Report Printing Key Combination issie see se ee EE Ee ee EE Ge Ke ke Ke 247 Vale gg SP 200 Systm SAUS ss Eg RR N ie Re NO 249 Table 94 SP 200 Natvork Statistics SMEER ORE RS REEKSE GEE GESNEDE ee EFI N ed Ke Ged 251 Table 95 Matwerk Cable TVDOS ss ss ee SE FEE De Bee de Ed riva toni d doen at SE BA dd 252 Table 96 WAN Port Cable Ping Assignments sees ee ese se ee Ee AE Ge AE ee ke 252 Table 87 LAN Fort Cable Pin Assignments Reede pr erp DER EE eN Ee Ra Ee ee EE EE 253 Table 88 Console Part Pin Assignmel uiuis rrr ttn n rrt tta d tn Re ee ee by be eg nea 254 Table 99 DB25 Male to DB9 Male Connector Ping Assignment eeens 254 Table 100 Classes of IP Addresses si EE RE REK ke trii tet Ge iia anian 269 Table 101 Allowed IP Address Range By Class iese ee ee ese ee ee Ee AA EE ee ee ed ee ea 269 Table 102 Natal MASKS aas ke GEE GES GE SE GR GR RM Ge ee Ge 270 Table 103 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation issie see Ee EE Ke GEE
259. ress of the DHCP server Primary These fields are visible when you enter S in the DHCP Service field Secondary DNS IP Enter the IP address of the DNS server s in the Primary DNS IP Address and or Address Secondary DNS IP Address fields You must specify a DNS server At the S ave and return R eturn without saving M odify prompt type S and press ENTER to save the changes and return to the previous screen type R and press ENTER to discard all changes and return to the previous screen or type M and press ENTER to continue configuring the fields Restart the device when prompted Press ESC and enter Y to stop any actions in the current screen and return to the previous screen All changes will be discarded 32 8 System Status From the main menu enter 4 and press ENTER to display the System Status menu as shown next Figure 170 SMT System Status System Status System Name Doamin Name Console Port Speed 9600 Web Server Port 80 E Mail Server Redirect WAN Configuration WAN Type D S P T DHCP Client IP Address IT2 21 9 6060 Subnet Mask 1255425550750 Gateway 172 21 0 254 Primary DNS Server 172 20 0 63 Secondary DNS Server 172 20 0 27 DHCP Configuration DHCP Service D R S Disable Press any key to return The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 78 SMT System Status FIELD DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the
260. rmation to this e mail address if you enable the feature in the Credit Card screen refer to Section 14 2 on page 117 for more information Submit Button Enter the label of the button on which subscribers clicks to send the information in the screen Additional Customer Data If you want to obtain more information from the subscribers select the checkbox es and specify the corresponding field label s Customer ID Select this checkbox to display this field and enter the field label for customer ID information First Last Select this checkbox to display these two fields and specify the field labels for the Name subscriber to enter the first and last names Company Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of a field in which subscribers enter a company name Address Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of a field in which subscribers enter their addresses City Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of a the field in which subscribers enter the city State Province Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of the field in which subscribers enter the state or province name Zip Postal Select this checkbox to display this field and specify the label name of the field in Code which subscribers enter the ZIP or postal code Country Select this checkbox to display this fiel
261. rnet Subscriber Server III Copyright c 2005 2015 All Rights Reserved Version 1 00 02 Username Password Note The VSG automatically logs you out after five minutes of inactivity Simply log back into the VSG if this happens 32 3 The SMT Main Menu Summary The SMT main menu is shown next 215 Chapter 32 Using The SMT VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 164 SMT Main Menu Enter selection Enter a numeric between 1 and 8 Main Menu 1 System Configuration 2 Wan Configuration 3 Lan Configuration 4 System Status 5 Utilities 6 Restart 7 Logout 8 Factory Defaults The following table describes the menu choices in this screen Table 71 SMT Main Menu NUMBER MENU TITLE FUNCTION 1 System Configuration Use this menu to set up general system setup 2 WAN Configuration Use this menu to configure the WAN port 3 LAN Configuration Use this menu to configure the LAN port 4 System Status Use this menu to view the current configuration of the VSG 5 Utilities Use this menu to perform firmware upgrades and change the login password Restart Use this menu to restart your VSG Logout Use this menu to log out of the SMT 8 Factory Defaults kun this menu to reset the VSG back to the factory default settings 32 4 Navigating the SMT Interface Familiarize yourself with the SMT operations before you attempt to modify the configuration
262. rt Mode C PPPoE Mostly for ADSL modem users C PPTP Mostly for Europe ADSL modem users The following table describes the LAN related fields in this screen Table 5 System Settings WAN LAN LAN Configuration FIELD DESCRIPTION LAN IP Address Enter the LAN IP address of the VSG in dotted decimal notation The default is 10 59 1 1 Subnet Mask Enter the LAN subnet mask in dotted decimal notation The default is 255 0 0 0 Note You must restart the VSG if you change the IP address If you set the VSG as a DHCP server on the LAN the VSG will automatically change the LAN DHCP settings based on the new LAN IP address 6 5 WAN Configuration To configure the WAN settings on the VSG click System Settings and WAN LAN The WAN LAN screen varies depending on the settings in the WAN Port Mode field 6 5 1 WAN MAC Address Use the WAN LAN screen to configure the MAC address of the WAN port by either setting the VSG to use the factory default or specify the MAC address of a computer on the LAN Chapter 6 LAN and WAN Setup 62 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 21 System Settings WAN LAN WAN MAC Address WANILAN LAN IP Address 10 59 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default RENE C Changeto 00 fpo o0 foo oo oo et automatically from a D C Use fixed IP address WAN Port Mode C PPPoE Mostly for ADSL modem users C PPTP Mostly for Europe ADSL modem users
263. rvices on the LAN Ethernet devices connected to the LAN interface must use static IP addresses Enter R Relay to set the VSG to forward network configuration requests to a DHCP server on the LAN network Then configure the Server IP Address and Agent IP Address fields Enter S Server to set the VSG to assign network information IP address DNS information etc to Ethernet device s connected to the LAN port This is the default setting Start IP Address This field is visible when you enter S in the DHCP Service field Enter the first of the continuous addresses in the IP address pool The default is 10 59 1 2 DHCP Pool Size This field is visible when you enter S in the DHCP Service field This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Enter a number not greater than 1024 The default is 253 Lease Time This field is visible when you enter S in the DHCP Service field Specify the time in minutes between 1 and 71582788 a DHCP client is allowed to use an assigned IP address When the lease time expires the DHCP client is given a new unused IP address The default is 1440 minutes Chapter 32 Using The SMT 222 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 77 SMT LAN Configuration continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Relay Server IP This field is only visible when you enter R in the DHCP Service field Address If the VSG is set to function as a DHCP relay enter the IP add
264. s Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 266 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 267 Appendix G Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 660HW T v2 User s Guide APPENDIX H IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses IP address classes and subnet masks You use subnet masks to subdivide a network into smaller logical networks Introduction to IP Addresses An IP address has two parts the network number and the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID identifies a single device on the network An IP address is made up of four octets written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 An octet is an 8 digit binary number Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal There are several classes of IP addresses The first network number 192 in the above example defines the class of IP address These are defined as follows Class A 0 to 127 Class B 128 to 191 Class C 192 to 223 Class D 224 to 239 Class E 240 to 255 IP Address Classes and Hosts The class of an IP address determines the number of hosts you can have on your network na class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets are the host ID Ina class B address the first two octets make up the network num
265. scribes the labels in this screen that you set to customize the information window 127 Chapter 15 Customization VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 36 Customization Information Window LABEL DESCRIPTION Window Name Enter a descriptive name up to 30 characters as the title of the window Display Information Window once after a subscriber logs in successfully Select this option to display the information window on the subscriber s computer after a successful login Clear this check box to disable this feature Redirect Select Redirect to display the information in the same web browser screen Pop Up Select Pop Up to display the information in a separate pop up web browser Screen Select Allow to close the pop up window if you want to allow subscribers to close the information pop up screen Clear this check box to display the information pop up screen all the time Information Window Content Window Name Enter a descriptive name for the window title Main message Enter a short message up to 30 characters Message Description Enter a short description about the information window Usage count label Enter the label for the field displaying the remaining time in the first text box provided This field displays when the VSG is set to use proprietary or RADIUS server without session timeout messages authentication Enter the label for the field displaying the amo
266. sk Notation continued SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE DECIMAL 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 129 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 104 Two Subnets Example IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C To make two networks divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 Note In the following charts shaded bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to make network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you
267. specifically for private use refer to Section 6 3 2 on page 61 please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address 6 3 2 Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks 10 0 04 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP
268. support the DHCP client when this feature is activated The VSG can also act as a surrogate DHCP server where it relays IP address assignment from the actual DHCP server to the clients 7 1 1 Public and Private Address Assignment When you configure the VSG as a DHCP server you can set the VSG to assign private or public IP addresses to subscriber computer s connected to the LAN port In most cases the VSG assigns private IP address to subscriber computer s connected on the LAN When the subscribers access the Internet NAT is applied This allows multiple computers to share one Internet connection With public IP address assignment through DHCP the VSG assigns public IP addresses to subscribers connected on the LAN In this case the VSG works as a bridge and NAT is NOT applied on the traffic However you need to obtain multiple public IP addresses one for the VSG and one for each computer from your ISP before you can use this feature 7 1 2 Server Configuration Use the Server Configuration screen to set the embedded web server the LAN DHCP server and specify the e mail server for e mail redirection on the VSG Click System Settings and Server to display the screen as shown next Chapter 7 Server 70 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 25 System Settings Server Server Server Port 80 SSL Security Web Server Administrator Idle Timeout 500 Min s 1 1440 C Disable C DHCP Relay DHCP Server IP Address D
269. t the bottom of the screen 3 If you want to keep all subscriber account information select Keep subscriber profile and or Keep port location mapping profile 4 Click Apply 5 Wait for the VSG to finish restarting before accessing the VSG again 201 Chapter 29 Configuration VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 30 Firmware This chapter shows you how to upgrade firmware on the VSG using the web configurator Note o NOT interrupt the file upload process as this may PERMANENTLY damage the device 30 1 Firmware Overview In the web configurator you can manually upgrade the firmware on the VSG or have it done automatically by setting up a schedule To manually upgrade the firmware you have to down the latest firmware from www zyxel com With scheduled firmware upgrade the VSG automatically checks for downloads and upgrades the latest firmware every time interval specified The following figure shows the links in the Firmware screen Figure 142 Firmware Links Manual Firmware Upgrade Scheduled Firmware Upgrade 30 2 Manual Firmware Upgrade Follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware manually 1 Download the latest firmware from www zyxel com to your computer Unzip the file if it is zipped 2 Access the web configurator Refer to the section on accessing the web configurator for instructions 3 Click System Tools Firmware and the Manual Firmware Upgrade link to display the screen as shown Figur
270. tart and accounting stop messages to the RADIUS server which uses these messages to accurately track subscriber Internet usage The VSG provides two accounting methods Accumulation and Time to Finish The Accumulation accounting method allows multiple re logins until the allocated time period or until the subscriber account is expired The VSG accounts for the time the subscriber logs in for Internet access The Time to Finish accounting method is good for one time logins Once a subscriber logs in the VSG stores the MAC address of the subscriber s computer for the duration of the time allocated Thus the subscriber does not have to enter the user name and password again for re login within the allocated time Once activated the subscriber account is valid until the allocated time is reached even if the subscriber disconnects Internet access for a certain period within the allocated time For example if Joe purchases a one hour time to finish account He starts using the Internet for the first 20 minutes and then disconnects Internet access to go to a 15 minute meeting Then he only has 25 minutes left on his account 81 Chapter 9 Authentication VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 31 Accounting Usage Time Time to Finish Log in A ma oC Log in Dele Log in E Time Log out Usage Time A B C D E 9 1 4 2 Vendor Specific Attribute Accumulation Log in A a ot Log in C
271. tarting characters affixed to the beginning of all account user names Postfix Specify the characters to append o the end of all account user names From Enter the first number of the range of static accounts Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts 96 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 23 Create Static Subscriber Account Generate Automatically continued LABEL DESCRIPTION To Enter the ending number of the range of static accounts Billing Profile Select a predefined billing profile from the drop down list box Note This drop down list box displays active profiles only Refer to Section 10 1 1 on page 88 for more information Random The VSG automatically generates a password for each automatically created static Password Length account Specify the length of the password from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to start generating the static accounts based on the above criterion After you have generated the list of static accounts in this screen click Static Account List to display the list of static accounts Refer to Section 11 6 on page 102 11 3 2 Creating Static Subscriber Accounts Manually To create static accounts manually display the Create Static Subscriber Account screen and scroll down to the Manually Add Static Subscriber Accounts section as shown next You can manually create up to 10 static accounts at a time Figure 44 Create Static Subscriber Account Manual
272. te All current port location mappings will be lost To restore from a local computer specify the name and location of the backup file or click Browse to locate it and click Apply To restore from a TFTP server specify the IP address of the TFTP server and the file name in the fields provided and click Apply Port Location Mapping This table displays a summary of each mapping rule If applicable click on a List heading to sort the entry Location ID This field displays the ID of a mapping rule Port ID This field displays the port ID Description This field displays a description Status This field displays the status No Charge Charge for use or Blocked of a mapping Delete Click Delete All to remove all accounts Click Delete to remove the selected account Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page Chapter 13 Port Location Mapping 114 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 115 Chapter 13 Port Location Mapping VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Credit Card This chapter shows you how to configure secure online credit card service on the VSG 14 1 Credit Card Overview Your VSG is integrated with various online secure credit card billing ser
273. tes in the Update every field Select Disable to de activate the accounting feature Authentication Method Select either the CHAP or PAP authentication method from the drop down list box Vendor Specific In the Vendor Code field specify a number for the vendor ID This is an Attribute IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority assigned number that identifies the vendor or enterprise Enter 890 for ZyXEL devices Select Send VSA together with Authentication Request to set the VSG to include the VSA information in the authentication requests Idle Timeout The VSG automatically disconnects a computer from the network after a period of inactivity The subscriber may need to enter the username and password again before access to the network is allowed Specify the idle timeout between 1 and 1440 minutes The default is 5 minutes SSL Login Page Security Select Enable to activate SSL security upon accessing the login screen so that user names and passwords are encrypted before being transmitted to the VSG Select Disable to de activate SSL security for the subscriber login screen Refer to Chapter 31 on page 206 for more information Smart Client Support WISPr WiFi Internet Service Provider Roaming allows roaming subscribers to access different service provider networks for seamless network connection WISPr Smart Client Select this option to allow the VSG to accept incoming roaming subscribers Clear this
274. the VSG to limit the number of sessions each user can use at a time Select Unlimited to allow each user to use any number of sessions at a time Select the second option and enter the number of sessions between 1 and 1024 each user is allowed to use at a time Layer 2 Isolation Security If you activate NAT select Enable in this field to prevent communication between subscribers This is the default selection Select Disable to deactivate layer 2 security and allow communication between subscribers Console Type Use this field to set the function of the console port on the front panel of the VSG Select Console Setting when you connect the console port directly to a computer for local management This is the default setting Select Statement Printer and select the printer model when you connect the console port a statement print Console Port The fields in this section of the screen are applicable when you select Select the fields below to configure the Console port Note If you change the console port settings make sure you also make the same change to the terminal emulator software Bits per This field only applies when you select Console Setting in the Console Type second field Select a console port speed from the drop down list box Choices are 1200 2400 4800 9600 default 14400 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Data bits Select a data bit from the drop down list box Parity Select the parity fr
275. the WAN port whereas inbound traffic refers to network traffic coming from the WAN port to a LAN port 16 1 1 Bandwidth Allocation The VSG provides two types of bandwidth control based on a subscriber s computer MAC address equal share or class based With equal share bandwidth allocation the VSG allocates an equal amount of outgoing and incoming bandwidth for each subscriber on the LAN With class based bandwidth allocation you can set up bandwidth classes in the billing profiles on the VSG or on a RADIUS server 16 2 Activating Bandwidth Management To activate bandwidth management click Advanced Setting Bandwidth and select the Bandwidth Management check box Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 144 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 93 Bandwidth Management Activate Bandwidth Management Equal bandwidth for all subscribers Bandwidth Management The function enables administrator to limit bandwidth usage on a per user basis MAC address That prevents users from consuming a disproportionately large amount of bandwidth so every user gets a fair share of the available bandwidth Maximum Upstream Bandwidth 255Kbps x C 10 Kbps 64 24576 Maximum Downstream Bandwidth 256Kbps 7 C 10 Kbps 64 24576 C Class of service based on RADIUS or billing profile settings The function enables administrator to limit bandwidth usage according to the RADIUS vendor specific attribute RADIUS authentication or billing pro
276. the latest firmware from www zyxel com to the TFTP server and update the synchronization file Figure 147 Scheduled Firmware Upgrade Example TFTP Server The following describes the automatic firmware upgrade process 1 The VSG checks the synchronization file on the TFTP server for the firmware version number 2 If the synchronization file has the latest firmware version number VSG retrieves the latest firmware file as specified in the synchronization file 3 VSG upgrades the firmware and restarts Note During the firmware upgrade process the VSG disconnects all subscriber Internet access Subscribers need to log in again Click System Tools Firmware and click the Scheduled Firmware Upgrade link to display the screen as shown next Figure 148 Firmware Scheduled Upgrade Scheduled Firmware Upgrade Disable C Enable TFTP Server IP Synchronization Check File View Sample File Weekly C Daily C Hourly Sunday 00 7 Hour 00 v Min Frequency Chapter 30 Firmware 204 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Firmware Scheduled Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Disable Select Disable to de activate scheduled firmware upgrade Enable Select Enable to activate scheduled firmware upgrade Then set the following fields TFTP Server IP Enter the IP address of the TFTP server where the firmware resides Synchronization A Synchr
277. ting for user name and password 10 2 2 PMS Configuration Click System Setting Billing and click the PMS Configuration link to display the screen as shown next 91 Chapter 10 Billing VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 39 System Setting Billing PMS Configuration Charge Mode only for Port Location Mapping enabled Regenerate password of static account with PMS checkout PMS Type Speed of PMS interface Many hotels use PMS as a hotel in door billing system for their guests including room service mini bar telephone usage as well as Internet service By integrating with a hotel s PMS the system can post charges for Internet access directly to a guest s hotel bill PMS Configuration Based on Room C Based on Subscriber Enable v only for Scenario B amp Micros Fidelio C Spectrum MK II Revenue Code Description nternet C Marriott Revenue Code Reference nternet C Proprietary Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 System Setting Billing PMS Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Charge Mode only for Port Location Mapping enabled When you set up Port Location Mapping your VSG offers two billing modes Based on Room and Based on Subscriber Select Based on Room when location is important If a subscriber disconnects from one location and reconnects in another location the VSG prompts for the user
278. ttings and click this link to preview the standard login screen in a Preview new browser window The following figure shows an example Figure 64 Subscriber Login Screen Example Standard Welcome Username Password Enter Cancel Note For credit card settings refer to Chapter 14 on page 116 15 2 2 Redirect Login Screen You can set the VSG to redirect the subscribers a to another login screen In the Login Screen Configuration screen select Redirect Figure 65 Customization Login Screen Redirect C Redirect Redirect Login Page URL Code Chapter 15 Customization 122 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide The following table describes the related fields Table 32 Customization Login Screen Redirect FIELD DESCRIPTION Redirect Select this option to redirect the subscriber to another login screen Redirect Login Page URL Specify the web site address to which the VSG directs the subscribers for logins Code Click Code to display the source code of the web page you specify above 15 2 3 Advanced Login Screen Use the Advanced login screen option to customize a login screen where you can create a welcome slogan and add advertising information Figure 66 Customization Login Screen Advanced Oo Avanced Welcome Slogan Welcome P Back d S None age Backgroun C Background Color FFFFFF View Color Grid Article Article Text Color
279. tus This field indicates whether the account is currently is use Online or not Offline Delete Click Delete All to remove all accounts Click Delete to remove the selected account s Go page Select a page number from the drop down list box to display the selected page First Click First to go to the first page Previous Click Previous to return to the previous page Next Click Next to go to the next page End Click End to go to the last page 103 Chapter 11 Static Subscriber Accounts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Dynamic Subscriber Accounts This chapter shows you how to set up and manage dynamic subscriber accounts 12 1 Dynamic Subscriber Account Overview Unlike a static account a dynamic account is not permanent Once the time allocated to a dynamic account is used up or a dynamic account remains un used after the expiration time the account is deleted from the account list automatically Dynamic accounts are automatically generated either by pressing a button on an external statement printer connected to the CONSOLE port or using the web configurator the Dynamic Account Operator Panel screen Note You cannot manually add a dynamic account The following figure displays the links for accessing the dynamic account configuration screens when you click System Settings Accounting and Dynamic Account Figure 52 Dynamic Account Links Static Account Dynamic Account Dynamic Account S
280. uccess to always simulate a successful credit card transaction Select Fail to always simulate a failed credit card transaction Chapter 14 Credit Card 118 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 30 Advanced Setting Credit Card continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Credit card icons Select the check box es of the credit card icon s that you want the VSG to display to be displayed on on the subscriber login screen refer to Figure 36 on page 87 for an example the login page Apply Click Apply to save the changes 119 Chapter 14 Credit Card VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 15 Customization This chapter shows you how to customize the subscriber login information user agreement and credit card screens and account or bill printouts 15 4 Customization Overview Use the Customization screens to configure the subscriber login screen the account information screen credit card option screen account printouts and bill printouts 15 2 Login Screen When subscriber authentication is activated in the Authentication Configuration screen the subscriber login screen is the first screen that all subscribers see when trying to access the Internet You can configure walled garden web addresses for web sites which all subscribers are allowed to access without logging in refer to Section 17 4 on page 149 The VSG provides different formats in which you can customize the login screen Standard Redirect A
281. unt of time used in the second text box provided This field displays when the VSG is set to use RADIUS without session timeout messages authentication Warning Alarm Messages Select this check box to display the warning message that you enter in the text box provided Notice Message Select this check box to display any additional message s that you enter in the test box es provided You can specify up to three additional messages such as discount information in the information window Preview Click to display a preview of the information window Apply Click Apply to save the changes The following figure shows an information window example Figure 73 Subscriber Pop up Information Window Example Information Window You can use Internet now This is an information window to show the usage and notice You can type http 1 1 1 1 info to open this window again without VPN connection Remaining Usage hh mm ss Chapter 15 Customization 128 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 15 4 Account Printout After you have created the subscriber accounts you can print out the account information The printout page is different for static and dynamic subscriber accounts To customize the account printout click Advanced Settings Customization and click the Account Printout link to display the screen as shown Figure 74 Customization Account Printout yyyyimm dd 7 HH mm ss 7 HI
282. uration screen or when you select RADIUS Server and the RADIUS server is configured not to send session timeout messages The information window displays the amount of time a subscriber still has to use for Internet access when you select RADIUS Server in the Authentication Configuration screen and the RADIUS server is configured to send session timeout messages Click Advanced Settings Customization and click the Information Window link to display a screen as shown next Figure 72 Customization Information Window Information Window Information window is a pop up window that is presented to subscribers with their browser once after subscriber login successfully The subscriber can type http 1 1 1 1 info to open this window again iv Display Information Window once after a subscriber logs in successfully C Redirect PopUp I Allow to close the pop up window Information Window Content Window Name Information Window Ma Main message You can use Internet now M Message Description This is an information window to sl Max 450 characte Standard usage count time traffic label or RADIUS with session timeout Remaining Usage M without session timeout Connecting Usage M Waming Alarm message If you don t want to continue using gmax 150 characte Usage count label Notice Text 1 Notice Ma Notice Text 2 If you are going to use VPN pleas mus Notice Text 3 Notice Message Preview The following table de
283. ut Transmit Data RD 4 Unused N U 5 Unused N U 6 Input Transmit Data RD 7 Unused N U 8 Unused N U Make sure that the Ethernet cable connection between the VSG and the hub or router conforms to the pin assignments as shown in the following diagram Appendix F Cable Types and Cable Pin Assignments 252 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 188 WAN Port Cable Pin Assignments ETHERNET DEVICE VANTAGE SERVICE GATEWAY ERES lt s ETC The LAN Port The following table describes the Ethernet cable pin assignments for the LAN port Table 97 LAN Port Cable Pin Assignments PIN NO RJ 45 SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT DESIGNATION 1 Input Transmit Data RD 12345678 2 Input Transmit Data RD 3 Output Transmit Data TD 4 Unused N U 5 Unused N U 6 Output Transmit Data TD 7 Unused N U 8 Unused N U Make sure that the Ethernet cable connection between the VSG and a computer or switch uplink port conforms to the pin assignments as shown in the figure Figure 189 LAN Port Cable Pin Assignments ETHERNET DEVICE VANTAGE SERVICE GATEWAY COMPUTER UPLINK PORT ELI e SES ee a ESL E e AE Serial Console Port The following table describes the console cable pin assignments for the serial console port 253 Appendix F Cable Types and Cable Pin Assignments VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Table 98 Console Port Pin Assignment
284. uter Computer 1 IP 192 168 1 10 This problem can be solved by adding a VLAN enabled switch or setting the computers to obtain IP addresses dynamically Appendix B IP Address Assignment Conflicts 238 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 239 Appendix B IP Address Assignment Conflicts VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Appendix C Subscriber Login To log in as a subscriber enter a web site address such as www zyxel com in a web browser Depending on the settings a subscriber login screen displays prompting for a user name and password Figure 182 Subscriber Login Screen Framed Example E http 1 1 1 1 http 192 168 1 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help Heak gt DY A search s Favorites Bristory Eh 4 md s Links gt Address wie Pity ete wa X Go ll Snagit Er P4 d E L Global Corporate Hews Product Support IWhere to Buy Contact Us Select a product FI search Internet Security Appliance New Product What s New Award amp Review Solution Center WAL October 20 2004 Basta P 334 wins 2004 ETE Residential Zy 5 Z ZyXEL Announces ZyWALL Remote Security budgetv SOHO firewall Best Dp Internet Security Appliance Client 2004 budget award from eg Tz maa Artoher 18 DANA 3 Mikrodatorn id lm hd Welcome Username Password Enter Cancel or click here to pay by credit card VISA Done ep Internet Enter a user name and password and
285. vate LAN The following figure shows a network example where computers A and B can communicate with each other in the private LAN Since computers C and D are not in the private LAN the VSG disallows communication between the two Figure 112 Private LAN Network Example l am N Sm v1 GE Er DNTON R gt Internet Esel i m m IX SS S o N 23 2 Configuring a Private LAN To specify the IP address es to belong to the private LAN click Advanced and Private LAN in the navigation panel Chapter 23 Private LAN 168 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 113 Private LAN Private LAN Private LAN Disable This feature allows to have a Private LAN under Plug and Play mode and Layer 2 Isolation enable Please enter new Private LAN device up to 50 entries amp Start End IP Address me C IP Address Add to List Private LAN device List No Active _ Private LAN Device IP Address List Delete 001 C 10 59 1 2 C 002 O 10 59 1 10 10 59 1 20 OD Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Advanced Private LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Private LAN Select Enable to activate the private LAN settings This allows Select Disable to deactivate this feature Start End IP Select this option to specify a range of IP addresses to belong to the private LAN Address Enter the beginning and the ending IP addresses in the fields provided IP A
286. vices that allow you to process credit card transactions via the Internet Note You must register with a credit card billing service provider before you can configure the VSG to handle credit card transactions 14 1 1 How Credit Card Billing Works The following summarizes the process of a customer paying for a subscriber account with a credit card 1 A customer accesses the subscriber login screen and selects a credit card payment option 2 The customer selects a service type and enters the contact and billing information 3 Customer billing information is processed real time via the secure online clearing house 4 After the transaction is successful the VSG provides the username and password information so the customer can log in for Internet access 14 1 2 Configuration Steps Do the following to provide online credit card billing service 1 Obtain a payment account from Authorize net iValidate or WorldPay 2 In the Authentication screen select Built in Authentication 3 Click Select option to display the Scenario Guide screen Select Scenario C and select the Allow Credit Card Payment option 4 Enter your payment account information in the Credit Card screen 5 Configure the subscriber credit card information screen see Section 15 6 on page 135 for more information Chapter 14 Credit Card 116 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide 14 2 Credit Card Billing Service Configuration After you have registered a payment account with
287. ware Installation and Connection VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide CHAPTER 3 The Web Configurator This chapter introduces how to access the web configurator and perform general system configuration 3 1 Introducing the Web Configurator The web configurator is best viewed with Internet Explorer version 5 5 or above or Netscape version 6 or later Note JavaScript support must be enabled 3 2 Accessing the Web Configurator Follow the steps below to access the web configurator Note The VSG allows only one web configurator session at a time 1 Make sure your VSG is properly connected refer to the instructions in Chapter 2 on page 38 2 Launch your web browser and type the WAN or LAN IP address of the VSG as the web site address 192 168 1 1 is the default IP address for the WAN port and 10 59 1 1 is the default IP address for the LAN port 3 If you are using a different port number between 8000 and 8099 for the web server you must also append the port number to the WAN IP address separated with a colon for example http 192 168 1 1 8080 Figure8 Entering IP Address in Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt G A A Qsearch Favorites History Address e 4 A login screen displays Type admin default as the administrator user name and 1234 default as the password and click Get Started Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 42
288. window 127 scenario options 85 C CA 206 CAS 80 Central Authentication Service See CAS certificate 206 private key 207 secret password 207 Certification Authority CA 206 certifications 3 notices 3 viewing 3 class based bandwidth allocation 144 activate 146 community 180 Concurrent Access 95 concurrent access 103 concurrent user 95 235 Index 276 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide allowable 185 set 95 configuration file backup 196 backup via TFTP 198 restore 199 restore via TFTP 199 configuration file management 35 console port 35 40 214 253 cable pin assignments 253 change function 59 communication parameters 214 DB25 male connector 254 DB9 male connector 254 establish a connection 214 SMT interface 214 speed 217 224 statement printer 59 Copyright 2 Cost Of Transmission 165 create billing profiles 88 create dynamic subscriber account 106 create port location mapping 112 create static subscriber account 95 create static subscriber accounts manually 97 credit card billing 32 116 authentication scenario option 87 configuration steps 116 credit card icons 119 how it works 116 service selection message 136 setup 117 subscriber login message 135 successful notification 139 transaction failed message 141 current user list 186 Customer Support 8 customize subscriber login screen 120 D daily account summary 247 desktop installation 38 device reset 33 40 47 DHCP 33 lease time 222 mode DHCP cli
289. y through other means This can arise in cases where RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that 1s directly connected to a remote node Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the VSG has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the VSG knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the VSG is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it does not know that there is a route through remote node Router 1 via Router 2 The static routes allow you to tell the VSG about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 110 Sample Static Routing Topology B REC e 1 AER cR B c mmm n Bu u 22 2 Static Route Setup Configure and view static route settings in the Static Route screen Click Advanced and Static Route to display the configuration screen Chapter 22 Static Route 164 VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 111 Advanced Static Route No Destination IP Address HET ll S 18 ef I CC a 1 Co No Destination IP Address Static Route Destination Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Hop Count Interface Lan 7 s TAA LAN v Static Route Table Destination Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Hop Count Interface Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Static Route LABEL
290. you need to enter a user name and password to log into the server needs to mail server check my account Username Enter the username for your email account Password Enter the password associated with the username above Email from Specify the information of the email sender Name Enter a descriptive name up to 20 printable characters of the sender This is for identification purposes Email Address Enter the email address of the sender For example vsg 1200 change com Email To Email Address 1 2 Enter the email addresses to which the VSG sends the logs Apply Click Apply to save the settings 24 1 2 Log Settings To specify which logs the VSG is to send and the schedule for when the VSG is to send the logs click Advanced Logs and click the Log Settings link 171 Chapter 24 Syslog VSG 1200 V2 User s Guide Figure 115 Logs Log Settings Log Settings The Syslog supports 4 types of syslog level 161 Alert 164 Warning 165 Notice 166 Inform System Syslog Email Syslog Name Description Interval Time Type A log including the system information will be fo z n System Information sent according to specified interval time 60 minutes 166 When system D O System Boot Notice Once system reboots the log will be sent REA y 155 A log would be sent if system account When system O System Account Activity Information Administrator Supervisor or Account accountloginor 166

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SHAPE CUTTING SYSTEMS FROM ESAB  Modicon TM5 - BERGER  Bibliothèques Numériques Mode d`emploi  Oster BRLY07-Z00-NP0 Instruction Manual  INSTALLATION AND OWNER`S MANUAL  ガス・石油機器の機器点検制度に関する 工業会の取組み  1 - TA Triumph  REGLONE® - Agrytec.com    Screen - Life and Times of the Color Computer  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file